1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2003-05-21
2 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 See the end for copying conditions.
6 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
7 For older news, see the file ONEWS
8 You can narrow news to the specific version by calling
9 `view-emacs-news' with a prefix argument or by typing C-u C-h C-n.
12 +++ indicates that the appropriate manual has already been updated.
13 --- means no change in the manuals is called for.
14 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
15 so we will look at it and add it to the manual.
18 * Installation Changes in Emacs 22.1
21 ** Emacs now supports new configure options `--program-prefix',
22 `--program-suffix' and `--program-transform-name' that affect the names of
26 ** Emacs can now be built without sound support.
29 ** You can build Emacs with Gtk+ widgets by specifying `--with-x-toolkit=gtk'
30 when you run configure. This requires Gtk+ 2.4 or newer. This port
31 provides a way to display multilingual text in menus (with some caveats).
34 ** The `emacsserver' program has been removed, replaced with Lisp code.
37 ** By default, Emacs now uses a setgid helper program to update game
38 scores. The directory ${localstatedir}/games/emacs is the normal
39 place for game scores to be stored. You can control this with the
40 configure option `--with-game-dir'. The specific user that Emacs uses
41 to own the game scores is controlled by `--with-game-user'. If access
42 to a game user is not available, then scores will be stored separately
43 in each user's home directory.
46 ** Leim is now part of the Emacs distribution.
47 You no longer need to download a separate tarball in order to build
51 ** The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual is now part of the distribution.
53 The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual in Info format is built as part of the
54 Emacs build procedure and installed together with the Emacs User
55 Manual. A menu item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy
56 accessible (Help->More Manuals->Emacs Lisp Reference).
59 ** The Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp manual is now part of
62 This manual is now part of the standard distribution and is installed,
63 together with the Emacs User Manual, into the Info directory. A menu
64 item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy accessible
65 (Help->More Manuals->Introduction to Emacs Lisp).
68 ** New translations of the Emacs Tutorial are available in the
69 following languages: Brasilian Portuguese, Bulgarian, Chinese (both
70 with simplified and traditional characters), French, and Italian.
71 Type `C-u C-h t' to choose one of them in case your language setup
72 doesn't automatically select the right one.
75 ** A French translation of the `Emacs Survival Guide' is available.
78 ** Emacs now includes support for loading image libraries on demand.
79 (Currently this feature is only used on MS Windows.) You can configure
80 the supported image types and their associated dynamic libraries by
81 setting the variable `image-library-alist'.
84 ** Support for Cygwin was added.
87 ** Support for FreeBSD/Alpha has been added.
90 ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on S390 machines was added.
93 ** Support for MacOS X was added.
94 See the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions.
97 ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on X86-64 machines was added.
100 ** Mac OS 9 port now uses the Carbon API by default. You can also
101 create non-Carbon build by specifying `NonCarbon' as a target. See
102 the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions.
105 ** Building with -DENABLE_CHECKING does not automatically build with union
106 types any more. Add -DUSE_LISP_UNION_TYPE if you want union types.
109 ** When pure storage overflows while dumping, Emacs now prints how
110 much pure storage it will approximately need.
112 ** The script etc/emacs-buffer.gdb can be used with gdb to retrieve the
113 contents of buffers from a core dump and save them to files easily, should
117 ** The Emacs terminal emulation in term.el uses a different terminfo name.
118 The Emacs terminal emulation in term.el now uses "eterm-color" as its
119 terminfo name, since term.el now supports color.
122 ** Emacs Lisp source files are compressed by default if `gzip' is available.
125 * Startup Changes in Emacs 22.1
128 ** New command line option -Q or --quick.
129 This is like using -q --no-site-file, but in addition it also disables
130 the fancy startup screen.
133 ** New command line option -D or --basic-display.
134 Disables the menu-bar, the tool-bar, the scroll-bars, tool tips, and
138 ** New command line option -nbc or --no-blinking-cursor disables
139 the blinking cursor on graphical terminals.
142 ** The option --script FILE runs Emacs in batch mode and loads FILE.
143 It is useful for writing Emacs Lisp shell script files, because they
144 can start with this line:
146 #!/usr/bin/emacs --script
149 ** The option --directory DIR now modifies `load-path' immediately.
150 Directories are added to the front of `load-path' in the order they
151 appear on the command line. For example, with this command line:
153 emacs -batch -L .. -L /tmp --eval "(require 'foo)"
155 Emacs looks for library `foo' in the parent directory, then in /tmp, then
156 in the other directories in `load-path'. (-L is short for --directory.)
159 ** The command line option --no-windows has been changed to
160 --no-window-system. The old one still works, but is deprecated.
163 ** If the environment variable DISPLAY specifies an unreachable X display,
164 Emacs will now startup as if invoked with the --no-window-system option.
167 ** The -f option, used from the command line to call a function,
168 now reads arguments for the function interactively if it is
169 an interactively callable function.
172 ** When you specify a frame size with --geometry, the size applies to
173 all frames you create. A position specified with --geometry only
174 affects the initial frame.
177 ** Emacs can now be invoked in full-screen mode on a windowed display.
178 When Emacs is invoked on a window system, the new command-line options
179 `--fullwidth', `--fullheight', and `--fullscreen' produce a frame
180 whose width, height, or both width and height take up the entire
181 screen size. (For now, this does not work with some window managers.)
184 ** Emacs now displays a splash screen by default even if command-line
185 arguments were given. The new command-line option --no-splash
186 disables the splash screen; see also the variable
187 `inhibit-startup-message' (which is also aliased as
188 `inhibit-splash-screen').
191 ** The default is now to use a bitmap as the icon, so the command-line options
192 --icon-type, -i has been replaced with options --no-bitmap-icon, -nbi to turn
196 ** New user option `inhibit-startup-buffer-menu'.
197 When loading many files, for instance with `emacs *', Emacs normally
198 displays a buffer menu. This option turns the buffer menu off.
202 If the init file ~/.emacs does not exist, Emacs will try
203 ~/.emacs.d/init.el or ~/.emacs.d/init.elc. You can also put the shell
204 init file .emacs_SHELL under ~/.emacs.d.
207 ** Emacs now reads the standard abbrevs file ~/.abbrev_defs
208 automatically at startup, if it exists. When Emacs offers to save
209 modified buffers, it saves the abbrevs too if they have changed. It
210 can do this either silently or asking for confirmation first,
211 according to the value of `save-abbrevs'.
213 * Incompatible Editing Changes in Emacs 22.1
216 ** M-g is now a prefix key.
217 M-g g and M-g M-g run goto-line.
218 M-g n and M-g M-n run next-error (like C-x `).
219 M-g p and M-g M-p run previous-error.
222 ** C-u M-g M-g switches to the most recent previous buffer,
223 and goes to the specified line in that buffer.
225 When goto-line starts to execute, if there's a number in the buffer at
226 point then it acts as the default argument for the minibuffer.
229 ** The old bindings C-M-delete and C-M-backspace have been deleted,
230 since there are situations where one or the other will shut down
231 the operating system or your X server.
234 ** line-move-ignore-invisible now defaults to t.
237 ** When the undo information of the current command gets really large
238 (beyond the value of `undo-outer-limit'), Emacs discards it and warns
242 ** `apply-macro-to-region-lines' now operates on all lines that begin
243 in the region, rather than on all complete lines in the region.
246 ** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a
247 previous mark if you set `set-mark-command-repeat-pop' to t. I.e. C-u
248 C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... cycles through the mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC
249 to set the mark immediately after a jump.
252 ** The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i
253 have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S.
256 ** In incremental search, C-w is changed. M-%, C-M-w and C-M-y are special.
258 See below under "incremental search changes".
261 ** C-x C-f RET, typing nothing in the minibuffer, is no longer a special case.
263 Since the default input is the current directory, this has the effect
264 of specifying the current directory. Normally that means to visit the
265 directory with Dired.
267 You can get the old behavior by typing C-x C-f M-n RET, which fetches
268 the actual file name into the minibuffer.
271 ** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only
272 to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point,
273 it remains unchanged.
276 ** When Emacs prompts for file names, SPC no longer completes the file name.
277 This is so filenames with embedded spaces could be input without the
278 need to quote the space with a C-q. The underlying changes in the
279 keymaps that are active in the minibuffer are described below under
280 "New keymaps for typing file names".
283 ** M-o now is the prefix key for setting text properties;
284 M-o M-o requests refontification.
287 ** You can now follow links by clicking Mouse-1 on the link.
289 See below for more details.
292 ** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now
293 control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded
294 by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards
295 too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the
296 doublequotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent
297 special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'.
299 * Editing Changes in Emacs 22.1
302 ** !MEM FULL! at the start of the mode line indicates that Emacs
303 cannot get any more memory for Lisp data. This often means it could
304 crash soon if you do things that use more memory. On most systems,
305 killing buffers will get out of this state. If killing buffers does
306 not make !MEM FULL! disappear, you should save your work and start
310 ** The max size of buffers and integers has been doubled.
311 On 32bit machines, it is now 256M (i.e. 268435455).
314 ** You can now switch buffers in a cyclic order with C-x C-left
315 (previous-buffer) and C-x C-right (next-buffer). C-x left and
316 C-x right can be used as well. The functions keep a different buffer
317 cycle for each frame, using the frame-local buffer list.
320 ** `undo-only' does an undo which does not redo any previous undo.
323 ** M-SPC (just-one-space) when given a numeric argument N
324 converts whitespace around point to N spaces.
327 ** C-x 5 C-o displays a specified buffer in another frame
328 but does not switch to that frame. It's the multi-frame
329 analogue of C-x 4 C-o.
332 ** New commands to operate on pairs of open and close characters:
333 `insert-pair', `delete-pair', `raise-sexp'.
336 ** New command `kill-whole-line' kills an entire line at once.
337 By default, it is bound to C-S-<backspace>.
340 ** Yanking text now discards certain text properties that can
341 be inconvenient when you did not expect them. The variable
342 `yank-excluded-properties' specifies which ones. Insertion
343 of register contents and rectangles also discards these properties.
346 ** The default values of paragraph-start and indent-line-function have
347 been changed to reflect those used in Text mode rather than those used
348 in Indented-Text mode.
351 ** M-x setenv now expands environment variable references.
353 Substrings of the form `$foo' and `${foo}' in the specified new value
354 now refer to the value of environment variable foo. To include a `$'
355 in the value, use `$$'.
358 ** `special-display-buffer-names' and `special-display-regexps' now
359 understand two new boolean pseudo-frame-parameters `same-frame' and
363 ** The default for the paper size (variable ps-paper-type) is taken
366 ** The command `list-faces-display' now accepts a prefix arg.
367 When passed, the function prompts for a regular expression and lists
368 only faces matching this regexp.
370 ** Mark command changes:
373 *** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a
374 previous mark, i.e. C-u C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... cycles through the
375 mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC to set the mark immediately after a jump.
378 *** Marking commands extend the region when invoked multiple times.
380 If you type C-M-SPC (mark-sexp), M-@ (mark-word), M-h
381 (mark-paragraph), or C-M-h (mark-defun) repeatedly, the marked region
382 extends each time, so you can mark the next two sexps with M-C-SPC
383 M-C-SPC, for example. This feature also works for
384 mark-end-of-sentence, if you bind that to a key. It also extends the
385 region when the mark is active in Transient Mark mode, regardless of
386 the last command. To start a new region with one of marking commands
387 in Transient Mark mode, you can deactivate the active region with C-g,
388 or set the new mark with C-SPC.
391 *** M-h (mark-paragraph) now accepts a prefix arg.
393 With positive arg, M-h marks the current and the following paragraphs;
394 if the arg is negative, it marks the current and the preceding
398 *** Some commands do something special in Transient Mark mode when the
399 mark is active--for instance, they limit their operation to the
400 region. Even if you don't normally use Transient Mark mode, you might
401 want to get this behavior from a particular command. There are two
402 ways you can enable Transient Mark mode and activate the mark, for one
405 One method is to type C-SPC C-SPC; this enables Transient Mark mode
406 and sets the mark at point. The other method is to type C-u C-x C-x.
407 This enables Transient Mark mode temporarily but does not alter the
410 After these commands, Transient Mark mode remains enabled until you
411 deactivate the mark. That typically happens when you type a command
412 that alters the buffer, but you can also deactivate the mark by typing
416 *** Movement commands `beginning-of-buffer', `end-of-buffer',
417 `beginning-of-defun', `end-of-defun' do not set the mark if the mark
418 is already active in Transient Mark mode.
420 ** Help command changes:
423 *** Changes in C-h bindings:
425 C-h e displays the *Messages* buffer.
427 C-h d runs apropos-documentation.
429 C-h followed by a control character is used for displaying files
432 C-h C-f displays the FAQ.
433 C-h C-e displays the PROBLEMS file.
435 The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i
436 have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S.
438 C-h c, C-h k, C-h w, and C-h f now handle remapped interactive commands.
439 - C-h c and C-h k report the actual command (after possible remapping)
440 run by the key sequence.
441 - C-h w and C-h f on a command which has been remapped now report the
442 command it is remapped to, and the keys which can be used to run
445 For example, if C-k is bound to kill-line, and kill-line is remapped
446 to new-kill-line, these commands now report:
447 - C-h c and C-h k C-k reports:
448 C-k runs the command new-kill-line
449 - C-h w and C-h f kill-line reports:
450 kill-line is remapped to new-kill-line which is on C-k, <deleteline>
451 - C-h w and C-h f new-kill-line reports:
452 new-kill-line is on C-k
455 *** Help commands `describe-function' and `describe-key' now show function
456 arguments in lowercase italics on displays that support it. To change the
457 default, customize face `help-argument-name' or redefine the function
458 `help-default-arg-highlight'.
461 *** C-h v and C-h f commands now include a hyperlink to the C source for
462 variables and functions defined in C (if the C source is available).
465 *** Help mode now only makes hyperlinks for faces when the face name is
466 preceded or followed by the word `face'. It no longer makes
467 hyperlinks for variables without variable documentation, unless
468 preceded by one of the words `variable' or `option'. It now makes
469 hyperlinks to Info anchors (or nodes) if the anchor (or node) name is
470 enclosed in single quotes and preceded by `info anchor' or `Info
471 anchor' (in addition to earlier `info node' and `Info node'). In
472 addition, it now makes hyperlinks to URLs as well if the URL is
473 enclosed in single quotes and preceded by `URL'.
476 *** The new command `describe-char' (C-u C-x =) pops up a buffer with
477 description various information about a character, including its
478 encodings and syntax, its text properties, how to input, overlays, and
479 widgets at point. You can get more information about some of them, by
480 clicking on mouse-sensitive areas or moving there and pressing RET.
483 *** The command `list-text-properties-at' has been deleted because
484 C-u C-x = gives the same information and more.
487 *** New command `display-local-help' displays any local help at point
488 in the echo area. It is bound to `C-h .'. It normally displays the
489 same string that would be displayed on mouse-over using the
490 `help-echo' property, but, in certain cases, it can display a more
491 keyboard oriented alternative.
494 *** New user option `help-at-pt-display-when-idle' allows to
495 automatically show the help provided by `display-local-help' on
496 point-over, after suitable idle time. The amount of idle time is
497 determined by the user option `help-at-pt-timer-delay' and defaults
498 to one second. This feature is turned off by default.
501 *** The apropos commands now accept a list of words to match.
502 When more than one word is specified, at least two of those words must
503 be present for an item to match. Regular expression matching is still
507 *** The new option `apropos-sort-by-scores' causes the matching items
508 to be sorted according to their score. The score for an item is a
509 number calculated to indicate how well the item matches the words or
510 regular expression that you entered to the apropos command. The best
511 match is listed first, and the calculated score is shown for each
514 ** Incremental Search changes:
517 *** Vertical scrolling is now possible within incremental search.
518 To enable this feature, customize the new user option
519 `isearch-allow-scroll'. User written commands which satisfy stringent
520 constraints can be marked as "scrolling commands". See the Emacs manual
524 *** C-w in incremental search now grabs either a character or a word,
525 making the decision in a heuristic way. This new job is done by the
526 command `isearch-yank-word-or-char'. To restore the old behavior,
527 bind C-w to `isearch-yank-word' in `isearch-mode-map'.
530 *** C-y in incremental search now grabs the next line if point is already
531 at the end of a line.
534 *** C-M-w deletes and C-M-y grabs a character in isearch mode.
535 Another method to grab a character is to enter the minibuffer by `M-e'
536 and to type `C-f' at the end of the search string in the minibuffer.
539 *** M-% typed in isearch mode invokes `query-replace' or
540 `query-replace-regexp' (depending on search mode) with the current
541 search string used as the string to replace.
544 *** Isearch no longer adds `isearch-resume' commands to the command
545 history by default. To enable this feature, customize the new
546 user option `isearch-resume-in-command-history'.
548 ** Replace command changes:
551 *** New user option `query-replace-skip-read-only': when non-nil,
552 `query-replace' and related functions simply ignore
553 a match if part of it has a read-only property.
556 *** When used interactively, the commands `query-replace-regexp' and
557 `replace-regexp' allow \,expr to be used in a replacement string,
558 where expr is an arbitrary Lisp expression evaluated at replacement
559 time. In many cases, this will be more convenient than using
560 `query-replace-regexp-eval'. `\#' in a replacement string now refers
561 to the count of replacements already made by the replacement command.
562 All regular expression replacement commands now allow `\?' in the
563 replacement string to specify a position where the replacement string
564 can be edited for each replacement.
567 *** query-replace uses isearch lazy highlighting when the new user option
568 `query-replace-lazy-highlight' is non-nil.
571 *** The current match in query-replace is highlighted in new face
572 `query-replace' which by default inherits from isearch face.
574 ** File operation changes:
577 *** Unquoted `$' in file names do not signal an error any more when
578 the corresponding environment variable does not exist.
579 Instead, the `$ENVVAR' text is left as is, so that `$$' quoting
580 is only rarely needed.
583 *** In processing a local variables list, Emacs strips the prefix and
584 suffix from every line before processing all the lines.
587 *** If the local variables list contains any variable-value pairs that
588 are not known to be safe, Emacs shows a prompt asking whether to apply
589 the local variables list as a whole. In earlier versions, a prompt
590 was only issued for variables explicitly marked as risky (for the
591 definition of risky variables, see `risky-local-variable-p').
593 At the prompt, the user can choose to save the contents of this local
594 variables list to `safe-local-variable-values'. This new customizable
595 option is a list of variable-value pairs that are known to be safe.
596 Variables can also be marked as safe with the existing
597 `safe-local-variable' property (see `safe-local-variable-p').
598 However, risky variables will not be added to
599 `safe-local-variable-values' in this way.
602 *** find-file-read-only visits multiple files in read-only mode,
603 when the file name contains wildcard characters.
606 *** find-alternate-file replaces the current file with multiple files,
607 when the file name contains wildcard characters.
610 *** Auto Compression mode is now enabled by default.
613 *** C-x C-f RET, typing nothing in the minibuffer, is no longer a special case.
615 Since the default input is the current directory, this has the effect
616 of specifying the current directory. Normally that means to visit the
617 directory with Dired.
620 *** When you are root, and you visit a file whose modes specify
621 read-only, the Emacs buffer is now read-only too. Type C-x C-q if you
622 want to make the buffer writable. (As root, you can in fact alter the
626 *** C-x s (save-some-buffers) now offers an option `d' to diff a buffer
627 against its file, so you can see what changes you would be saving.
630 *** The commands copy-file, rename-file, make-symbolic-link and
631 add-name-to-file, when given a directory as the "new name" argument,
632 convert it to a file name by merging in the within-directory part of
633 the existing file's name. (This is the same convention that shell
634 commands cp, mv, and ln follow.) Thus, M-x copy-file RET ~/foo RET
635 /tmp RET copies ~/foo to /tmp/foo.
638 *** When used interactively, `format-write-file' now asks for confirmation
639 before overwriting an existing file, unless a prefix argument is
640 supplied. This behavior is analogous to `write-file'.
643 *** The variable `auto-save-file-name-transforms' now has a third element that
644 controls whether or not the function `make-auto-save-file-name' will
645 attempt to construct a unique auto-save name (e.g. for remote files).
648 *** The new option `write-region-inhibit-fsync' disables calls to fsync
649 in `write-region'. This can be useful on laptops to avoid spinning up
650 the hard drive upon each file save. Enabling this variable may result
651 in data loss, use with care.
654 *** If the user visits a file larger than `large-file-warning-threshold',
655 Emacs asks for confirmation.
658 *** require-final-newline now has two new possible values:
660 `visit' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's needed
661 when visiting the file.
663 `visit-save' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's
664 needed when visiting the file, and also add a newline if it's needed
665 when saving the file.
668 *** The new option mode-require-final-newline controls how certain
669 major modes enable require-final-newline. Any major mode that's
670 designed for a kind of file that should normally end in a newline
671 sets require-final-newline based on mode-require-final-newline.
672 So you can customize mode-require-final-newline to control what these
675 ** Minibuffer changes:
678 *** The new file-name-shadow-mode is turned ON by default, so that when
679 entering a file name, any prefix which Emacs will ignore is dimmed.
682 *** There's a new face `minibuffer-prompt'.
683 Emacs adds this face to the list of text properties stored in the
684 variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', which is used to display the
688 *** Enhanced visual feedback in `*Completions*' buffer.
690 Completions lists use faces to highlight what all completions
691 have in common and where they begin to differ.
693 The common prefix shared by all possible completions uses the face
694 `completions-common-part', while the first character that isn't the
695 same uses the face `completions-first-difference'. By default,
696 `completions-common-part' inherits from `default', and
697 `completions-first-difference' inherits from `bold'. The idea of
698 `completions-common-part' is that you can use it to make the common
699 parts less visible than normal, so that the rest of the differing
700 parts is, by contrast, slightly highlighted.
702 Above fontification is always done when listing completions is
703 triggered at minibuffer. If you want to fontify completions whose
704 listing is triggered at the other normal buffer, you have to pass
705 the common prefix of completions to `display-completion-list' as
709 *** File-name completion can now ignore specified directories.
710 If an element of the list in `completion-ignored-extensions' ends in a
711 slash `/', it indicates a subdirectory that should be ignored when
712 completing file names. Elements of `completion-ignored-extensions'
713 which do not end in a slash are never considered when a completion
714 candidate is a directory.
717 *** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only
718 to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point,
719 it remains unchanged.
722 *** New user option `history-delete-duplicates'.
723 If set to t when adding a new history element, all previous identical
724 elements are deleted.
726 ** Redisplay changes:
729 *** The mode line position information now comes before the major mode.
730 When the file is maintained under version control, that information
731 appears between the position information and the major mode.
734 *** New face `escape-glyph' highlights control characters and escape glyphs.
737 *** Non-breaking space and hyphens are now displayed with a special
738 face, either nobreak-space or escape-glyph. You can turn this off or
739 specify a different mode by setting the variable `nobreak-char-display'.
742 *** The parameters of automatic hscrolling can now be customized.
743 The variable `hscroll-margin' determines how many columns away from
744 the window edge point is allowed to get before automatic hscrolling
745 will horizontally scroll the window. The default value is 5.
747 The variable `hscroll-step' determines how many columns automatic
748 hscrolling scrolls the window when point gets too close to the
749 window edge. If its value is zero, the default, Emacs scrolls the
750 window so as to center point. If its value is an integer, it says how
751 many columns to scroll. If the value is a floating-point number, it
752 gives the fraction of the window's width to scroll the window.
754 The variable `automatic-hscrolling' was renamed to
755 `auto-hscroll-mode'. The old name is still available as an alias.
758 *** Moving or scrolling through images (and other lines) taller than
759 the window now works sensibly, by automatically adjusting the window's
763 *** The new face `mode-line-inactive' is used to display the mode line
764 of non-selected windows. The `mode-line' face is now used to display
765 the mode line of the currently selected window.
767 The new variable `mode-line-in-non-selected-windows' controls whether
768 the `mode-line-inactive' face is used.
771 *** You can now customize the use of window fringes. To control this
772 for all frames, use M-x fringe-mode or the Show/Hide submenu of the
773 top-level Options menu, or customize the `fringe-mode' variable. To
774 control this for a specific frame, use the command M-x
778 *** Angle icons in the fringes can indicate the buffer boundaries. In
779 addition, up and down arrow bitmaps in the fringe indicate which ways
780 the window can be scrolled.
782 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
783 `indicate-buffer-boundaries' to a non-nil value. The default value of
784 this variable is found in `default-indicate-buffer-boundaries'.
786 If value is `left' or `right', both angle and arrow bitmaps are
787 displayed in the left or right fringe, resp.
789 The value can also be an alist which specifies the presence and
790 position of each bitmap individually.
792 For example, ((top . left) (t . right)) places the top angle bitmap
793 in left fringe, the bottom angle bitmap in right fringe, and both
794 arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show just the angle bitmaps in the
795 left fringe, but no arrow bitmaps, use ((top . left) (bottom . left)).
798 *** On window systems, lines which are exactly as wide as the window
799 (not counting the final newline character) are no longer broken into
800 two lines on the display (with just the newline on the second line).
801 Instead, the newline now "overflows" into the right fringe, and the
802 cursor will be displayed in the fringe when positioned on that newline.
804 The new user option 'overflow-newline-into-fringe' can be set to nil to
805 revert to the old behavior of continuing such lines.
808 *** When a window has display margin areas, the fringes are now
809 displayed between the margins and the buffer's text area, rather than
810 outside those margins.
813 *** A window can now have individual fringe and scroll-bar settings,
814 in addition to the individual display margin settings.
816 Such individual settings are now preserved when windows are split
817 horizontally or vertically, a saved window configuration is restored,
818 or when the frame is resized.
820 ** Cursor display changes:
823 *** On X, MS Windows, and Mac OS, the blinking cursor's "off" state is
824 now controlled by the variable `blink-cursor-alist'.
827 *** The X resource cursorBlink can be used to turn off cursor blinking.
830 *** Emacs can produce an underscore-like (horizontal bar) cursor.
831 The underscore cursor is set by putting `(cursor-type . hbar)' in
832 default-frame-alist. It supports variable heights, like the `bar'
836 *** Display of hollow cursors now obeys the buffer-local value (if any)
837 of `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' in the buffer that the cursor
841 *** The variable `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' can now be set to any
842 of the recognized cursor types.
845 *** On text terminals, the variable `visible-cursor' controls whether Emacs
846 uses the "very visible" cursor (the default) or the normal cursor.
851 *** `mode-line-highlight' is the standard face indicating mouse sensitive
852 elements on mode-line (and header-line) like `highlight' face on text
855 *** `mode-line-buffer-id' is the standard face for buffer identification
856 parts of the mode line.
859 *** `shadow' face defines the appearance of the "shadowed" text, i.e.
860 the text which should be less noticeable than the surrounding text.
861 This can be achieved by using shades of grey in contrast with either
862 black or white default foreground color. This generic shadow face
863 allows customization of the appearance of shadowed text in one place,
864 so package-specific faces can inherit from it.
867 *** `vertical-border' face is used for the vertical divider between windows.
869 ** Font-Lock changes:
872 *** M-o now is the prefix key for setting text properties;
873 M-o M-o requests refontification.
876 *** All modes now support using M-x font-lock-mode to toggle
877 fontification, even those such as Occur, Info, and comint-derived
878 modes that do their own fontification in a special way.
880 The variable `Info-fontify' is no longer applicable; to disable
881 fontification in Info, remove `turn-on-font-lock' from
885 *** font-lock: in modes like C and Lisp where the fontification assumes that
886 an open-paren in column 0 is always outside of any string or comment,
887 font-lock now highlights any such open-paren-in-column-zero in bold-red
888 if it is inside a string or a comment, to indicate that it can cause
889 trouble with fontification and/or indentation.
892 *** New standard font-lock face `font-lock-preprocessor-face'.
895 *** New standard font-lock face `font-lock-comment-delimiter-face'.
898 *** Easy to overlook single character negation can now be font-locked.
899 You can use the new variable `font-lock-negation-char-face' and the face of
900 the same name to customize this. Currently the cc-modes, sh-script-mode,
901 cperl-mode and make-mode support this.
904 *** The default settings for JIT stealth lock parameters are changed.
905 The default value for the user option jit-lock-stealth-time is now 16
906 instead of 3, and the default value of jit-lock-stealth-nice is now
907 0.5 instead of 0.125. The new defaults should lower the CPU usage
908 when Emacs is fontifying in the background.
911 *** jit-lock can now be delayed with `jit-lock-defer-time'.
913 If this variable is non-nil, its value should be the amount of Emacs
914 idle time in seconds to wait before starting fontification. For
915 example, if you set `jit-lock-defer-time' to 0.25, fontification will
916 only happen after 0.25s of idle time.
919 *** contextual refontification is now separate from stealth fontification.
921 jit-lock-defer-contextually is renamed jit-lock-contextually and
922 jit-lock-context-time determines the delay after which contextual
923 refontification takes place.
928 *** A menu item "Show/Hide" was added to the top-level menu "Options".
929 This menu allows you to turn various display features on and off (such
930 as the fringes, the tool bar, the speedbar, and the menu bar itself).
931 You can also move the vertical scroll bar to either side here or turn
932 it off completely. There is also a menu-item to toggle displaying of
933 current date and time, current line and column number in the mode-line.
936 *** Speedbar has moved from the "Tools" top level menu to "Show/Hide".
939 *** You can exit dialog windows and menus by typing C-g.
942 *** The menu item "Open File..." has been split into two items, "New File..."
943 and "Open File...". "Open File..." now opens only existing files. This is
944 to support existing GUI file selection dialogs better.
947 *** The file selection dialog for Gtk+, Mac, W32 and Motif/Lesstif can be
948 disabled by customizing the variable `use-file-dialog'.
951 *** The pop up menus for Lucid now stay up if you do a fast click and can
952 be navigated with the arrow keys (like Gtk+, Mac and W32).
955 *** The Lucid menus can display multilingual text in your locale. You have
956 to explicitly specify a fontSet resource for this to work, for example
957 `-xrm "Emacs*fontSet: -*-helvetica-medium-r-*--*-120-*-*-*-*-*-*,*"'.
960 *** Dialogs for Lucid/Athena and Lesstif/Motif now pops down when pressing
961 ESC, like they do for Gtk+, Mac and W32.
964 *** For the Gtk+ version, you can make Emacs use the old file dialog
965 by setting the variable `x-use-old-gtk-file-dialog' to t. Default is to use
971 *** If you set the new variable `mouse-autoselect-window' to a non-nil
972 value, windows are automatically selected as you move the mouse from
973 one Emacs window to another, even within a frame. A minibuffer window
974 can be selected only when it is active.
977 *** On X, when the window manager requires that you click on a frame to
978 select it (give it focus), the selected window and cursor position
979 normally changes according to the mouse click position. If you set
980 the variable x-mouse-click-focus-ignore-position to t, the selected
981 window and cursor position do not change when you click on a frame
985 *** You can now follow links by clicking Mouse-1 on the link.
987 Traditionally, Emacs uses a Mouse-1 click to set point and a Mouse-2
988 click to follow a link, whereas most other applications use a Mouse-1
989 click for both purposes, depending on whether you click outside or
990 inside a link. Now the behavior of a Mouse-1 click has been changed
991 to match this context-sentitive dual behavior. (If you prefer the old
992 behavior, set the user option `mouse-1-click-follows-link' to nil.)
994 Depending on the current mode, a Mouse-2 click in Emacs can do much
995 more than just follow a link, so the new Mouse-1 behavior is only
996 activated for modes which explicitly mark a clickable text as a "link"
997 (see the new function `mouse-on-link-p' for details). The Lisp
998 packages that are included in release 22.1 have been adapted to do
999 this, but external packages may not yet support this. However, there
1000 is no risk in using such packages, as the worst thing that could
1001 happen is that you get the original Mouse-1 behavior when you click
1002 on a link, which typically means that you set point where you click.
1004 If you want to get the original Mouse-1 action also inside a link, you
1005 just need to press the Mouse-1 button a little longer than a normal
1006 click (i.e. press and hold the Mouse-1 button for half a second before
1009 Dragging the Mouse-1 inside a link still performs the original
1010 drag-mouse-1 action, typically copy the text.
1012 You can customize the new Mouse-1 behavior via the new user options
1013 `mouse-1-click-follows-link' and `mouse-1-click-in-non-selected-windows'.
1016 *** Emacs normally highlights mouse sensitive text whenever the mouse
1017 is over the text. By setting the new variable `mouse-highlight', you
1018 can optionally enable mouse highlighting only after you move the
1019 mouse, so that highlighting disappears when you press a key. You can
1020 also disable mouse highlighting.
1023 *** You can now customize if selecting a region by dragging the mouse
1024 shall not copy the selected text to the kill-ring by setting the new
1025 variable mouse-drag-copy-region to nil.
1028 *** mouse-wheels can now scroll a specific fraction of the window
1029 (rather than a fixed number of lines) and the scrolling is `progressive'.
1032 *** Emacs ignores mouse-2 clicks while the mouse wheel is being moved.
1034 People tend to push the mouse wheel (which counts as a mouse-2 click)
1035 unintentionally while turning the wheel, so these clicks are now
1036 ignored. You can customize this with the mouse-wheel-click-event and
1037 mouse-wheel-inhibit-click-time variables.
1040 *** Under X, mouse-wheel-mode is turned on by default.
1042 ** Multilingual Environment (Mule) changes:
1045 *** Language environment and various default coding systems are setup
1046 more correctly according to the current locale name. If the locale
1047 name doesn't specify a charset, the default is what glibc defines.
1048 This change can result in using the different coding systems as
1049 default in some locale (e.g. vi_VN).
1052 *** The keyboard-coding-system is now automatically set based on your
1053 current locale settings if you are not using a window system. This
1054 can mean that the META key doesn't work but generates non-ASCII
1055 characters instead, depending on how the terminal (or terminal
1056 emulator) works. Use `set-keyboard-coding-system' (or customize
1057 keyboard-coding-system) if you prefer META to work (the old default)
1058 or if the locale doesn't describe the character set actually generated
1059 by the keyboard. See Info node `Single-Byte Character Support'.
1062 *** The new command `revert-buffer-with-coding-system' (C-x RET r)
1063 revisits the current file using a coding system that you specify.
1066 *** New command `recode-region' decodes the region again by a specified
1070 *** The new command `recode-file-name' changes the encoding of the name
1074 *** New command `ucs-insert' inserts a character specified by its
1078 *** The new command `set-file-name-coding-system' (C-x RET F) sets
1079 coding system for encoding and decoding file names. A new menu item
1080 (Options->Mule->Set Coding Systems->For File Name) invokes this
1084 *** New command quail-show-key shows what key (or key sequence) to type
1085 in the current input method to input a character at point.
1088 *** Limited support for character `unification' has been added.
1089 Emacs now knows how to translate between different representations of
1090 the same characters in various Emacs charsets according to standard
1091 Unicode mappings. This applies mainly to characters in the ISO 8859
1092 sets plus some other 8-bit sets, but can be extended. For instance,
1093 translation works amongst the Emacs ...-iso8859-... charsets and the
1094 mule-unicode-... ones.
1096 By default this translation happens automatically on encoding.
1097 Self-inserting characters are translated to make the input conformant
1098 with the encoding of the buffer in which it's being used, where
1101 You can force a more complete unification with the user option
1102 unify-8859-on-decoding-mode. That maps all the Latin-N character sets
1103 into Unicode characters (from the latin-iso8859-1 and
1104 mule-unicode-0100-24ff charsets) on decoding. Note that this mode
1105 will often effectively clobber data with an iso-2022 encoding.
1108 *** There is support for decoding Greek and Cyrillic characters into
1109 either Unicode (the mule-unicode charsets) or the iso-8859 charsets,
1110 when possible. The latter are more space-efficient. This is
1111 controlled by user option utf-fragment-on-decoding.
1114 *** New language environments: French, Ukrainian, Tajik,
1115 Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, UTF-8, Windows-1255, Welsh, Latin-6,
1116 Latin-7, Lithuanian, Latvian, Swedish, Slovenian, Croatian, Georgian,
1117 Italian, Russian, Malayalam, Tamil, Russian, Chinese-EUC-TW. (Set up
1118 automatically according to the locale.)
1121 *** New input methods: latin-alt-postfix, latin-postfix, latin-prefix,
1122 ukrainian-computer, belarusian, bulgarian-bds, russian-computer,
1123 vietnamese-telex, lithuanian-numeric, lithuanian-keyboard,
1124 latvian-keyboard, welsh, georgian, rfc1345, ucs, sgml,
1125 bulgarian-phonetic, dutch, slovenian, croatian, malayalam-inscript,
1129 *** New input method chinese-sisheng for inputting Chinese Pinyin
1133 *** Improved Thai support. A new minor mode `thai-word-mode' (which is
1134 automatically activated if you select Thai as a language
1135 environment) changes key bindings of most word-oriented commands to
1136 versions which recognize Thai words. Affected commands are
1140 M-DEL (backward-kill-word)
1141 M-t (transpose-words)
1142 M-q (fill-paragraph)
1145 *** Indian support has been updated.
1146 The in-is13194 coding system is now Unicode-based. CDAC fonts are
1147 assumed. There is a framework for supporting various
1148 Indian scripts, but currently only Devanagari, Malayalam and Tamil are
1152 *** A UTF-7 coding system is available in the library `utf-7'.
1155 *** The utf-8/16 coding systems have been enhanced.
1156 By default, untranslatable utf-8 sequences are simply composed into
1157 single quasi-characters. User option `utf-translate-cjk-mode' (it is
1158 turned on by default) arranges to translate many utf-8 CJK character
1159 sequences into real Emacs characters in a similar way to the Mule-UCS
1160 system. As this loads a fairly big data on demand, people who are not
1161 interested in CJK characters may want to customize it to nil.
1162 You can augment/amend the CJK translation via hash tables
1163 `ucs-mule-cjk-to-unicode' and `ucs-unicode-to-mule-cjk'. The utf-8
1164 coding system now also encodes characters from most of Emacs's
1165 one-dimensional internal charsets, specifically the ISO-8859 ones.
1166 The utf-16 coding system is affected similarly.
1169 *** A new coding system `euc-tw' has been added for traditional Chinese
1170 in CNS encoding; it accepts both Big 5 and CNS as input; on saving,
1171 Big 5 is then converted to CNS.
1174 *** Many new coding systems are available in the `code-pages' library.
1175 These include complete versions of most of those in codepage.el, based
1176 on Unicode mappings. `codepage-setup' is now obsolete and is used
1177 only in the MS-DOS port of Emacs. All coding systems defined in
1178 `code-pages' are auto-loaded.
1181 *** New variable `utf-translate-cjk-unicode-range' controls which
1182 Unicode characters to translate in `utf-translate-cjk-mode'.
1185 *** iso-10646-1 (`Unicode') fonts can be used to display any range of
1186 characters encodable by the utf-8 coding system. Just specify the
1187 fontset appropriately.
1189 ** Customize changes:
1192 *** Custom themes are collections of customize options. Create a
1193 custom theme with M-x customize-create-theme. Use M-x load-theme to
1194 load and enable a theme, and M-x disable-theme to disable it. Use M-x
1195 enable-theme to enable a disabled theme.
1198 *** The commands M-x customize-face and M-x customize-face-other-window
1199 now look at the character after point. If a face or faces are
1200 specified for that character, the commands by default customize those
1204 *** The face-customization widget has been reworked to be less confusing.
1205 In particular, when you enable a face attribute using the corresponding
1206 check-box, there's no longer a redundant `*' option in value selection
1207 for that attribute; the values you can choose are only those which make
1208 sense for the attribute. When an attribute is de-selected by unchecking
1209 its check-box, then the (now ignored, but still present temporarily in
1210 case you re-select the attribute) value is hidden.
1213 *** When you set or reset a variable's value in a Customize buffer,
1214 the previous value becomes the "backup value" of the variable.
1215 You can go back to that backup value by selecting "Use Backup Value"
1216 under the "[State]" button.
1218 ** Buffer Menu changes:
1221 *** New command `Buffer-menu-toggle-files-only' toggles display of file
1222 buffers only in the Buffer Menu. It is bound to T in Buffer Menu
1226 *** `buffer-menu' and `list-buffers' now list buffers whose names begin
1227 with a space, when those buffers are visiting files. Normally buffers
1228 whose names begin with space are omitted.
1231 *** The new options `buffers-menu-show-directories' and
1232 `buffers-menu-show-status' let you control how buffers are displayed
1233 in the menu dropped down when you click "Buffers" from the menu bar.
1235 `buffers-menu-show-directories' controls whether the menu displays
1236 leading directories as part of the file name visited by the buffer.
1237 If its value is `unless-uniquify', the default, directories are
1238 shown unless uniquify-buffer-name-style' is non-nil. The value of nil
1239 and t turn the display of directories off and on, respectively.
1241 `buffers-menu-show-status' controls whether the Buffers menu includes
1242 the modified and read-only status of the buffers. By default it is
1243 t, and the status is shown.
1245 Setting these variables directly does not take effect until next time
1246 the Buffers menu is regenerated.
1251 *** New faces dired-header, dired-mark, dired-marked, dired-flagged,
1252 dired-ignored, dired-directory, dired-symlink, dired-warning
1253 introduced for Dired mode instead of font-lock faces.
1256 *** New Dired command `dired-compare-directories' marks files
1257 with different file attributes in two dired buffers.
1260 *** New Dired command `dired-do-touch' (bound to T) changes timestamps
1261 of marked files with the value entered in the minibuffer.
1264 *** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now
1265 control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded
1266 by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards
1267 too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the
1268 double quotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent
1269 special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'.
1272 *** In Dired, the w command now copies the current line's file name
1273 into the kill ring. With a zero prefix arg, copies absolute file names.
1276 *** In Dired-x, Omitting files is now a minor mode, dired-omit-mode.
1278 The mode toggling command is bound to M-o. A new command
1279 dired-mark-omitted, bound to * O, marks omitted files. The variable
1280 dired-omit-files-p is obsoleted, use the mode toggling function
1284 *** The variables dired-free-space-program and dired-free-space-args
1285 have been renamed to directory-free-space-program and
1286 directory-free-space-args, and they now apply whenever Emacs puts a
1287 directory listing into a buffer.
1292 *** The comint prompt can now be made read-only, using the new user
1293 option `comint-prompt-read-only'. This is not enabled by default,
1294 except in IELM buffers. The read-only status of IELM prompts can be
1295 controlled with the new user option `ielm-prompt-read-only', which
1296 overrides `comint-prompt-read-only'.
1298 The new commands `comint-kill-whole-line' and `comint-kill-region'
1299 support editing comint buffers with read-only prompts.
1301 `comint-kill-whole-line' is like `kill-whole-line', but ignores both
1302 read-only and field properties. Hence, it always kill entire
1303 lines, including any prompts.
1305 `comint-kill-region' is like `kill-region', except that it ignores
1306 read-only properties, if it is safe to do so. This means that if any
1307 part of a prompt is deleted, then the entire prompt must be deleted
1308 and that all prompts must stay at the beginning of a line. If this is
1309 not the case, then `comint-kill-region' behaves just like
1310 `kill-region' if read-only properties are involved: it copies the text
1311 to the kill-ring, but does not delete it.
1314 *** The new command `comint-insert-previous-argument' in comint-derived
1315 modes (shell-mode, etc.) inserts arguments from previous command lines,
1316 like bash's `ESC .' binding. It is bound by default to `C-c .', but
1317 otherwise behaves quite similarly to the bash version.
1320 *** `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' has been renamed
1321 `comint-use-prompt-regexp'. The old name has been kept as an alias,
1322 but declared obsolete.
1324 ** M-x Compile changes:
1327 *** M-x compile has become more robust and reliable
1329 Quite a few more kinds of messages are recognized. Messages that are
1330 recognized as warnings or informational come in orange or green, instead of
1331 red. Informational messages are by default skipped with `next-error'
1332 (controlled by `compilation-skip-threshold').
1334 Location data is collected on the fly as the *compilation* buffer changes.
1335 This means you could modify messages to make them point to different files.
1336 This also means you can not go to locations of messages you may have deleted.
1338 The variable `compilation-error-regexp-alist' has now become customizable. If
1339 you had added your own regexps to this, you'll probably need to include a
1340 leading `^', otherwise they'll match anywhere on a line. There is now also a
1341 `compilation-mode-font-lock-keywords' and it nicely handles all the checks
1342 that configure outputs and -o options so you see at a glance where you are.
1344 The new file etc/compilation.txt gives examples of each type of message.
1347 *** New user option `compilation-environment'.
1348 This option allows you to specify environment variables for inferior
1349 compilation processes without affecting the environment that all
1350 subprocesses inherit.
1353 *** New user option `compilation-disable-input'.
1354 If this is non-nil, send end-of-file as compilation process input.
1357 *** New options `next-error-highlight' and `next-error-highlight-no-select'
1358 specify the method of highlighting of the corresponding source line
1359 in new face `next-error'.
1362 *** A new minor mode `next-error-follow-minor-mode' can be used in
1363 compilation-mode, grep-mode, occur-mode, and diff-mode (i.e. all the
1364 modes that can use `next-error'). In this mode, cursor motion in the
1365 buffer causes automatic display in another window of the corresponding
1366 matches, compilation errors, etc. This minor mode can be toggled with
1370 *** When the left fringe is displayed, an arrow points to current message in
1371 the compilation buffer.
1374 *** The new variable `compilation-context-lines' controls lines of leading
1375 context before the current message. If nil and the left fringe is displayed,
1376 it doesn't scroll the compilation output window. If there is no left fringe,
1377 no arrow is displayed and a value of nil means display the message at the top
1380 ** Occur mode changes:
1383 *** In the *Occur* buffer, `o' switches to it in another window, and
1384 C-o displays the current line's occurrence in another window without
1388 *** You can now use next-error (C-x `) and previous-error to advance to
1389 the next/previous matching line found by M-x occur.
1392 *** The new command `multi-occur' is just like `occur', except it can
1393 search multiple buffers. There is also a new command
1394 `multi-occur-in-matching-buffers' which allows you to specify the
1395 buffers to search by their filenames or buffer names. Internally,
1396 Occur mode has been rewritten, and now uses font-lock, among other
1402 *** Grep has been decoupled from compilation mode setup.
1404 There's a new separate package grep.el, with its own submenu and
1405 customization group.
1408 *** `grep-find' is now also available under the name `find-grep' where
1409 people knowing `find-grep-dired' would probably expect it.
1412 *** New commands `lgrep' (local grep) and `rgrep' (recursive grep) are
1413 more user-friendly versions of `grep' and `grep-find', which prompt
1414 separately for the regular expression to match, the files to search,
1415 and the base directory for the search (rgrep only). Case sensitivitivy
1416 of the search is controlled by the current value of `case-fold-search'.
1418 These commands build the shell commands based on the new variables
1419 `grep-template' (lgrep) and `grep-find-template' (rgrep).
1421 The files to search can use aliases defined in `grep-files-aliases'.
1423 Subdirectories listed in `grep-find-ignored-directories' such as those
1424 typically used by various version control systems, like CVS and arch,
1425 are automatically skipped by `rgrep'.
1428 *** The grep commands provide highlighting support.
1430 Hits are fontified in green, and hits in binary files in orange. Grep buffers
1431 can be saved and automatically revisited.
1434 *** The new variables `grep-window-height' and `grep-scroll-output' override
1435 the corresponding compilation mode settings, for grep commands only.
1438 *** New option `grep-highlight-matches' highlights matches in *grep*
1439 buffer. It uses a special feature of some grep programs which accept
1440 --color option to output markers around matches. When going to the next
1441 match with `next-error' the exact match is highlighted in the source
1442 buffer. Otherwise, if `grep-highlight-matches' is nil, the whole
1443 source line is highlighted.
1446 *** New key bindings in grep output window:
1447 SPC and DEL scrolls window up and down. C-n and C-p moves to next and
1448 previous match in the grep window. RET jumps to the source line of
1449 the current match. `n' and `p' shows next and previous match in
1450 other window, but does not switch buffer. `{' and `}' jumps to the
1451 previous or next file in the grep output. TAB also jumps to the next
1455 *** M-x grep now tries to avoid appending `/dev/null' to the command line
1456 by using GNU grep `-H' option instead. M-x grep automatically
1457 detects whether this is possible or not the first time it is invoked.
1458 When `-H' is used, the grep command line supplied by the user is passed
1459 unchanged to the system to execute, which allows more complicated
1460 command lines to be used than was possible before.
1462 ** X Windows Support:
1465 *** Emacs now supports drag and drop for X. Dropping a file on a window
1466 opens it, dropping text inserts the text. Dropping a file on a dired
1467 buffer copies or moves the file to that directory.
1470 *** Under X11, it is possible to swap Alt and Meta (and Super and Hyper).
1471 The new variables `x-alt-keysym', `x-hyper-keysym', `x-meta-keysym',
1472 and `x-super-keysym' can be used to choose which keysyms Emacs should
1473 use for the modifiers. For example, the following two lines swap
1475 (setq x-alt-keysym 'meta)
1476 (setq x-meta-keysym 'alt)
1479 *** The X resource useXIM can be used to turn off use of XIM, which can
1480 speed up Emacs with slow networking to the X server.
1482 If the configure option `--without-xim' was used to turn off use of
1483 XIM by default, the X resource useXIM can be used to turn it on.
1486 *** The new variable `x-select-request-type' controls how Emacs
1487 requests X selection. The default value is nil, which means that
1488 Emacs requests X selection with types COMPOUND_TEXT and UTF8_STRING,
1489 and use the more appropriately result.
1492 *** The scrollbar under LessTif or Motif has a smoother drag-scrolling.
1493 On the other hand, the size of the thumb does not represent the actual
1494 amount of text shown any more (only a crude approximation of it).
1499 *** If you enable Xterm Mouse mode, Emacs will respond to mouse clicks
1500 on the mode line, header line and display margin, when run in an xterm.
1503 *** Improved key bindings support when running in an xterm.
1504 When emacs is running in an xterm more key bindings are available. The
1505 following should work:
1506 {C,S,C-S,A}-{right,left,up,down,prior,next,delete,insert,F1-12}.
1507 These key bindings work on xterm from X.org 6.8, they might not work on
1508 some older versions of xterm, or on some proprietary versions.
1510 ** Character terminal color support changes:
1513 *** The new command-line option --color=MODE lets you specify a standard
1514 mode for a tty color support. It is meant to be used on character
1515 terminals whose capabilities are not set correctly in the terminal
1516 database, or with terminal emulators which support colors, but don't
1517 set the TERM environment variable to a name of a color-capable
1518 terminal. "emacs --color" uses the same color commands as GNU `ls'
1519 when invoked with "ls --color", so if your terminal can support colors
1520 in "ls --color", it will support "emacs --color" as well. See the
1521 user manual for the possible values of the MODE parameter.
1524 *** Emacs now supports several character terminals which provide more
1525 than 8 colors. For example, for `xterm', 16-color, 88-color, and
1526 256-color modes are supported. Emacs automatically notes at startup
1527 the extended number of colors, and defines the appropriate entries for
1528 all of these colors.
1531 *** Emacs now uses the full range of available colors for the default
1532 faces when running on a color terminal, including 16-, 88-, and
1533 256-color xterms. This means that when you run "emacs -nw" on an
1534 88-color or 256-color xterm, you will see essentially the same face
1538 *** There's a new support for colors on `rxvt' terminal emulator.
1540 * New Modes and Packages in Emacs 22.1
1542 ** ERC is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1544 ERC is a powerful, modular, and extensible IRC client for Emacs.
1546 To see what modules are available, type
1547 M-x customize-option erc-modules RET.
1549 To start an IRC session, type M-x erc-select, and follow the prompts
1550 for server, port, and nick.
1553 ** Rcirc is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1555 Rcirc is an Internet relay chat (IRC) client. It supports
1556 simultaneous connections to multiple IRC servers. Each discussion
1557 takes place in its own buffer. For each connection you can join
1558 several channels (many-to-many) and participate in private
1559 (one-to-one) chats. Both channel and private chats are contained in
1562 To start an IRC session, type M-x irc, and follow the prompts for
1563 server, port, nick and initial channels.
1566 ** Newsticker is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1568 Newsticker asynchronously retrieves headlines (RSS) from a list of news
1569 sites, prepares these headlines for reading, and allows for loading the
1570 corresponding articles in a web browser. Its documentation is in a
1574 ** savehist saves minibuffer histories between sessions.
1575 To use this feature, turn on savehist-mode in your `.emacs' file.
1578 ** Filesets are collections of files. You can define a fileset in
1579 various ways, such as based on a directory tree or based on
1580 program files that include other program files.
1582 Once you have defined a fileset, you can perform various operations on
1583 all the files in it, such as visiting them or searching and replacing
1587 ** Calc is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1589 Calc is an advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool written in
1590 Emacs Lisp. The prefix for Calc has been changed to `C-x *' and Calc
1591 can be started with `C-x * *'. The Calc manual is separate from the
1592 Emacs manual; within Emacs, type "C-h i m calc RET" to read the
1593 manual. A reference card is available in `etc/calccard.tex' and
1597 ** The new package ibuffer provides a powerful, completely
1598 customizable replacement for buff-menu.el.
1601 ** Ido mode is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1603 The ido (interactively do) package is an extension of the iswitchb
1604 package to do interactive opening of files and directories in addition
1605 to interactive buffer switching. Ido is a superset of iswitchb (with
1606 a few exceptions), so don't enable both packages.
1609 ** Image files are normally visited in Image mode, which lets you toggle
1610 between viewing the image and viewing the text using C-c C-c.
1613 ** CUA mode is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1615 The new cua package provides CUA-like keybindings using C-x for
1616 cut (kill), C-c for copy, C-v for paste (yank), and C-z for undo.
1617 With cua, the region can be set and extended using shifted movement
1618 keys (like pc-selection-mode) and typed text replaces the active
1619 region (like delete-selection-mode). Do not enable these modes with
1620 cua-mode. Customize the variable `cua-mode' to enable cua.
1622 In addition, cua provides unified rectangle support with visible
1623 rectangle highlighting: Use C-return to start a rectangle, extend it
1624 using the movement commands (or mouse-3), and cut or copy it using C-x
1625 or C-c (using C-w and M-w also works).
1627 Use M-o and M-c to `open' or `close' the rectangle, use M-b or M-f, to
1628 fill it with blanks or another character, use M-u or M-l to upcase or
1629 downcase the rectangle, use M-i to increment the numbers in the
1630 rectangle, use M-n to fill the rectangle with a numeric sequence (such
1631 as 10 20 30...), use M-r to replace a regexp in the rectangle, and use
1632 M-' or M-/ to restrict command on the rectangle to a subset of the
1633 rows. See the commentary in cua-base.el for more rectangle commands.
1635 Cua also provides unified support for registers: Use a numeric
1636 prefix argument between 0 and 9, i.e. M-0 .. M-9, for C-x, C-c, and
1637 C-v to cut or copy into register 0-9, or paste from register 0-9.
1639 The last text deleted (not killed) is automatically stored in
1640 register 0. This includes text deleted by typing text.
1642 Finally, cua provides a global mark which is set using S-C-space.
1643 When the global mark is active, any text which is cut or copied is
1644 automatically inserted at the global mark position. See the
1645 commentary in cua-base.el for more global mark related commands.
1647 The features of cua also works with the standard emacs bindings for
1648 kill, copy, yank, and undo. If you want to use cua mode, but don't
1649 want the C-x, C-c, C-v, and C-z bindings, you can customize the
1650 `cua-enable-cua-keys' variable.
1652 Note: This version of cua mode is not backwards compatible with older
1653 versions of cua.el and cua-mode.el. To ensure proper operation, you
1654 must remove older versions of cua.el or cua-mode.el as well as the
1655 loading and customization of those packages from the .emacs file.
1658 ** Org mode is now part of the Emacs distribution
1660 Org mode is a mode for keeping notes, maintaining ToDo lists, and
1661 doing project planning with a fast and effective plain-text system.
1662 It also contains a plain-text table editor with spreadsheet-like
1665 The Org mode table editor can be integrated into any major mode by
1666 activating the minor Orgtbl-mode.
1668 The documentation for org-mode is in a separate manual; within Emacs,
1669 type "C-h i m org RET" to read that manual. A reference card is
1670 available in `etc/orgcard.tex' and `etc/orgcard.ps'.
1673 ** The new package dns-mode.el add syntax highlight of DNS master files.
1674 The key binding C-c C-s (`dns-mode-soa-increment-serial') can be used
1675 to increment the SOA serial.
1678 ** The new global minor mode `file-name-shadow-mode' modifies the way
1679 filenames being entered by the user in the minibuffer are displayed, so
1680 that it's clear when part of the entered filename will be ignored due to
1681 emacs' filename parsing rules. The ignored portion can be made dim,
1682 invisible, or otherwise less visually noticeable. The display method can
1683 be displayed by customizing the variable `file-name-shadow-properties'.
1686 ** The new package flymake.el does on-the-fly syntax checking of program
1687 source files. See the Flymake's Info manual for more details.
1690 ** The new keypad setup package provides several common bindings for
1691 the numeric keypad which is available on most keyboards. The numeric
1692 keypad typically has the digits 0 to 9, a decimal point, keys marked
1693 +, -, /, and *, an Enter key, and a NumLock toggle key. The keypad
1694 package only controls the use of the digit and decimal keys.
1696 By customizing the variables `keypad-setup', `keypad-shifted-setup',
1697 `keypad-numlock-setup', and `keypad-numlock-shifted-setup', or by
1698 using the function `keypad-setup', you can rebind all digit keys and
1699 the decimal key of the keypad in one step for each of the four
1700 possible combinations of the Shift key state (not pressed/pressed) and
1701 the NumLock toggle state (off/on).
1703 The choices for the keypad keys in each of the above states are:
1704 `Plain numeric keypad' where the keys generates plain digits,
1705 `Numeric keypad with decimal key' where the character produced by the
1706 decimal key can be customized individually (for internationalization),
1707 `Numeric Prefix Arg' where the keypad keys produce numeric prefix args
1708 for emacs editing commands, `Cursor keys' and `Shifted Cursor keys'
1709 where the keys work like (shifted) arrow keys, home/end, etc., and
1710 `Unspecified/User-defined' where the keypad keys (kp-0, kp-1, etc.)
1711 are left unspecified and can be bound individually through the global
1715 ** The new kmacro package provides a simpler user interface to
1716 emacs' keyboard macro facilities.
1718 Basically, it uses two function keys (default F3 and F4) like this:
1719 F3 starts a macro, F4 ends the macro, and pressing F4 again executes
1720 the last macro. While defining the macro, F3 inserts a counter value
1721 which automatically increments every time the macro is executed.
1723 There is now a keyboard macro ring which stores the most recently
1726 The C-x C-k sequence is now a prefix for the kmacro keymap which
1727 defines bindings for moving through the keyboard macro ring,
1728 C-x C-k C-p and C-x C-k C-n, editing the last macro C-x C-k C-e,
1729 manipulating the macro counter and format via C-x C-k C-c,
1730 C-x C-k C-a, and C-x C-k C-f. See the commentary in kmacro.el
1733 The normal macro bindings C-x (, C-x ), and C-x e now interfaces to
1734 the keyboard macro ring.
1736 The C-x e command now automatically terminates the current macro
1737 before calling it, if used while defining a macro.
1739 In addition, when ending or calling a macro with C-x e, the macro can
1740 be repeated immediately by typing just the `e'. You can customize
1741 this behavior via the variables kmacro-call-repeat-key and
1742 kmacro-call-repeat-with-arg.
1744 Keyboard macros can now be debugged and edited interactively.
1745 C-x C-k SPC steps through the last keyboard macro one key sequence
1746 at a time, prompting for the actions to take.
1749 ** New minor mode, Visible mode, toggles invisibility in the current buffer.
1750 When enabled, it makes all invisible text visible. When disabled, it
1751 restores the previous value of `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
1754 ** The wdired.el package allows you to use normal editing commands on Dired
1755 buffers to change filenames, permissions, etc...
1758 ** The new package longlines.el provides a minor mode for editing text
1759 files composed of long lines, based on the `use-hard-newlines'
1760 mechanism. The long lines are broken up by inserting soft newlines,
1761 which are automatically removed when saving the file to disk or
1762 copying into the kill ring, clipboard, etc. By default, Longlines
1763 mode inserts soft newlines automatically during editing, a behavior
1764 referred to as "soft word wrap" in other text editors. This is
1765 similar to Refill mode, but more reliable. To turn the word wrap
1766 feature off, set `longlines-auto-wrap' to nil.
1769 ** The printing package is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1771 If you enable the printing package by including (require 'printing) in
1772 the .emacs file, the normal Print item on the File menu is replaced
1773 with a Print sub-menu which allows you to preview output through
1774 ghostview, use ghostscript to print (if you don't have a PostScript
1775 printer) or send directly to printer a PostScript code generated by
1776 `ps-print' package. Use M-x pr-help for more information.
1779 ** The minor mode Reveal mode makes text visible on the fly as you
1780 move your cursor into hidden regions of the buffer.
1781 It should work with any package that uses overlays to hide parts
1782 of a buffer, such as outline-minor-mode, hs-minor-mode, hide-ifdef-mode, ...
1784 There is also Global Reveal mode which affects all buffers.
1787 ** The ruler-mode.el library provides a minor mode for displaying an
1788 "active" ruler in the header line. You can use the mouse to visually
1789 change the `fill-column', `window-margins' and `tab-stop-list'
1793 ** SES mode (ses-mode) is a new major mode for creating and editing
1794 spreadsheet files. Besides the usual Emacs features (intuitive command
1795 letters, undo, cell formulas in Lisp, plaintext files, etc.) it also offers
1796 viral immunity and import/export of tab-separated values.
1799 ** The new global minor mode `size-indication-mode' (off by default)
1800 shows the size of accessible part of the buffer on the mode line.
1803 ** The new package table.el implements editable, WYSIWYG, embedded
1804 `text tables' in Emacs buffers. It simulates the effect of putting
1805 these tables in a special major mode. The package emulates WYSIWYG
1806 table editing available in modern word processors. The package also
1807 can generate a table source in typesetting and markup languages such
1808 as latex and html from the visually laid out text table.
1810 ** The tumme.el package allows you to easily view, tag and in other ways
1811 manipulate image files and their thumbnails, using dired as the main interface.
1812 Tumme provides functionality to generate simple image galleries.
1815 ** Tramp is now part of the distribution.
1817 This package is similar to Ange-FTP: it allows you to edit remote
1818 files. But whereas Ange-FTP uses FTP to access the remote host,
1819 Tramp uses a shell connection. The shell connection is always used
1820 for filename completion and directory listings and suchlike, but for
1821 the actual file transfer, you can choose between the so-called
1822 `inline' methods (which transfer the files through the shell
1823 connection using base64 or uu encoding) and the `out-of-band' methods
1824 (which invoke an external copying program such as `rcp' or `scp' or
1825 `rsync' to do the copying).
1827 Shell connections can be acquired via `rsh', `ssh', `telnet' and also
1828 `su' and `sudo'. Ange-FTP is still supported via the `ftp' method.
1830 If you want to disable Tramp you should set
1832 (setq tramp-default-method "ftp")
1834 Removing Tramp, and re-enabling Ange-FTP, can be achieved by M-x
1838 ** The URL package (which had been part of W3) is now part of Emacs.
1841 ** `cfengine-mode' is a major mode for editing GNU Cfengine
1842 configuration files.
1845 ** The new package conf-mode.el handles thousands of configuration files, with
1846 varying syntaxes for comments (;, #, //, /* */ or !), assignment (var = value,
1847 var : value, var value or keyword var value) and sections ([section] or
1848 section { }). Many files under /etc/, or with suffixes like .cf through
1849 .config, .properties (Java), .desktop (KDE/Gnome), .ini and many others are
1853 ** GDB-Script-mode is used for files like .gdbinit.
1856 ** The new python.el package is used to edit Python and Jython programs.
1859 ** The TCL package tcl-mode.el was replaced by tcl.el.
1860 This was actually done in Emacs-21.1, and was not documented.
1862 ** The new package scroll-lock.el provides the Scroll Lock minor mode
1863 for pager-like scrolling. Keys which normally move point by line or
1864 paragraph will scroll the buffer by the respective amount of lines
1865 instead and point will be kept vertically fixed relative to window
1866 boundaries during scrolling.
1868 ** The file t-mouse.el is now part of Emacs and provides access to mouse
1869 events from the console. It still requires gpm to work but has been updated
1870 for Emacs 22. In particular, the mode-line is now position sensitive.
1872 * Changes in Specialized Modes and Packages in Emacs 22.1:
1877 *** Bindings for Tumme added
1878 Several new keybindings, all starting with the C-t prefix, have been
1879 added to Dired. They are all bound to commands in Tumme. As a starting
1880 point, mark some image files in a dired buffer and do C-t d to display
1881 thumbnails of them in a separate buffer.
1883 ** Changes in Hi Lock
1886 *** hi-lock-mode now only affects a single buffer, and a new function
1887 `global-hi-lock-mode' enables Hi Lock in all buffers. By default, if
1888 hi-lock-mode is used in what appears to be the initialization file, a
1889 warning message suggests to use global-hi-lock-mode instead. However,
1890 if the new variable `hi-lock-archaic-interface-deduce' is non-nil,
1891 using hi-lock-mode in an initialization file will turn on Hi Lock in all
1892 buffers and no warning will be issued (for compatibility with the
1893 behavior in older versions of Emacs).
1895 ** Changes in Allout
1897 *** Topic cryptography added, enabling easy gpg topic encryption and
1898 decryption. Per-topic basis enables interspersing encrypted-text and
1899 clear-text within a single file to your heart's content, using symmetric
1900 and/or public key modes. Time-limited key caching, user-provided
1901 symmetric key hinting and consistency verification, auto-encryption of
1902 pending topics on save, and more, make it easy to use encryption in
1905 *** Default command prefix changed to "\C-c " (control-c space), to avoid
1906 intruding on user's keybinding space. Customize the
1907 `allout-command-prefix' variable to your preference.
1909 *** Allout now uses text overlay's `invisible' property (and others) for
1910 concealed text, instead of selective-display. This simplifies the code, in
1911 particularly avoiding the need for kludges for isearch dynamic-display,
1912 discretionary handling of edits of concealed text, undo concerns, etc.
1914 *** Many substantial fixes and refinements, including:
1916 - repaired inhibition of inadvertent edits to concealed text
1917 - repaired retention of topic body hanging indent upon topic depth shifts
1918 - refuse to create "containment discontinuities", where a
1919 topic is shifted deeper than the offspring-depth of its' container
1920 - bulleting variation is simpler and more accommodating, both in the
1921 default behavior and in ability to vary when creating new topics
1922 - many internal fixes and refinements
1923 - many module and function docstring clarifications
1924 - version number incremented to 2.2
1926 ** The variable `woman-topic-at-point' was renamed
1927 to `woman-use-topic-at-point' and behaves differently: if this
1928 variable is non-nil, the `woman' command uses the word at point
1929 automatically, without asking for a confirmation. Otherwise, the word
1930 at point is suggested as default, but not inserted at the prompt.
1933 ** Changes to cmuscheme
1935 *** Emacs now offers to start Scheme if the user tries to
1936 evaluate a Scheme expression but no Scheme subprocess is running.
1938 *** If a file `.emacs_NAME' (where NAME is the name of the Scheme interpreter)
1939 exists in the user's home directory or in ~/.emacs.d, its
1940 contents are sent to the Scheme subprocess upon startup.
1942 *** There are new commands to instruct the Scheme interpreter to trace
1943 procedure calls (`scheme-trace-procedure') and to expand syntactic forms
1944 (`scheme-expand-current-form'). The commands actually sent to the Scheme
1945 subprocess are controlled by the user options `scheme-trace-command',
1946 `scheme-untrace-command' and `scheme-expand-current-form'.
1949 ** Makefile mode has submodes for automake, gmake, makepp, BSD make and imake.
1951 The former two couldn't be differentiated before, and the latter three
1952 are new. Font-locking is robust now and offers new customizable
1956 ** In Outline mode, `hide-body' no longer hides lines at the top
1957 of the file that precede the first header line.
1960 ** Telnet now prompts you for a port number with C-u M-x telnet.
1963 ** The terminal emulation code in term.el has been improved; it can
1964 run most curses applications now.
1967 ** M-x diff uses Diff mode instead of Compilation mode.
1970 ** Diff mode key bindings changed.
1972 These are the new bindings:
1974 C-c C-e diff-ediff-patch (old M-A)
1975 C-c C-n diff-restrict-view (old M-r)
1976 C-c C-r diff-reverse-direction (old M-R)
1977 C-c C-u diff-context->unified (old M-U)
1978 C-c C-w diff-refine-hunk (old C-c C-r)
1980 To convert unified to context format, use C-u C-c C-u.
1981 In addition, C-c C-u now operates on the region
1982 in Transient Mark mode when the mark is active.
1985 ** You can now customize `fill-nobreak-predicate' to control where
1986 filling can break lines. The value is now normally a list of
1987 functions, but it can also be a single function, for compatibility.
1989 Emacs provide two predicates, `fill-single-word-nobreak-p' and
1990 `fill-french-nobreak-p', for use as the value of
1991 `fill-nobreak-predicate'.
1994 ** M-x view-file and commands that use it now avoid interfering
1995 with special modes such as Tar mode.
1998 ** Commands `winner-redo' and `winner-undo', from winner.el, are now
1999 bound to C-c <left> and C-c <right>, respectively. This is an
2000 incompatible change.
2003 ** `global-whitespace-mode' is a new alias for `whitespace-global-mode'.
2006 ** M-x compare-windows now can automatically skip non-matching text to
2007 resync points in both windows.
2010 ** New user option `add-log-always-start-new-record'.
2012 When this option is enabled, M-x add-change-log-entry always
2013 starts a new record regardless of when the last record is.
2016 ** PO translation files are decoded according to their MIME headers
2017 when Emacs visits them.
2019 ** Info mode changes:
2022 *** A numeric prefix argument of `info' selects an Info buffer
2023 with the number appended to the `*info*' buffer name (e.g. "*info*<2>").
2026 *** isearch in Info uses Info-search and searches through multiple nodes.
2028 Before leaving the initial Info node isearch fails once with the error
2029 message [initial node], and with subsequent C-s/C-r continues through
2030 other nodes. When isearch fails for the rest of the manual, it wraps
2031 around the whole manual to the top/final node. The user option
2032 `Info-isearch-search' controls whether to use Info-search for isearch,
2033 or the default isearch search function that wraps around the current
2037 *** New search commands: `Info-search-case-sensitively' (bound to S),
2038 `Info-search-backward', and `Info-search-next' which repeats the last
2039 search without prompting for a new search string.
2042 *** New command `Info-history-forward' (bound to r and new toolbar icon)
2043 moves forward in history to the node you returned from after using
2044 `Info-history-back' (renamed from `Info-last').
2047 *** New command `Info-history' (bound to L) displays a menu of visited nodes.
2050 *** New command `Info-toc' (bound to T) creates a node with table of contents
2051 from the tree structure of menus of the current Info file.
2054 *** New command `info-apropos' searches the indices of the known
2055 Info files on your system for a string, and builds a menu of the
2059 *** New command `Info-copy-current-node-name' (bound to w) copies
2060 the current Info node name into the kill ring. With a zero prefix
2061 arg, puts the node name inside the `info' function call.
2064 *** New face `info-xref-visited' distinguishes visited nodes from unvisited
2065 and a new option `Info-fontify-visited-nodes' to control this.
2068 *** http and ftp links in Info are now operational: they look like cross
2069 references and following them calls `browse-url'.
2072 *** Info now hides node names in menus and cross references by default.
2074 If you prefer the old behavior, you can set the new user option
2075 `Info-hide-note-references' to nil.
2078 *** Images in Info pages are supported.
2080 Info pages show embedded images, in Emacs frames with image support.
2081 Info documentation that includes images, processed with makeinfo
2082 version 4.7 or newer, compiles to Info pages with embedded images.
2085 *** The default value for `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' is now nil.
2088 *** `Info-index' offers completion.
2090 ** Lisp mode changes:
2093 *** Lisp mode now uses `font-lock-doc-face' for doc strings.
2096 *** C-u C-M-q in Emacs Lisp mode pretty-prints the list after point.
2098 *** New features in evaluation commands
2101 **** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) called on defface reinitializes
2102 the face to the value specified in the defface expression.
2105 **** Typing C-x C-e twice prints the value of the integer result
2106 in additional formats (octal, hexadecimal, character) specified
2107 by the new function `eval-expression-print-format'. The same
2108 function also defines the result format for `eval-expression' (M-:),
2109 `eval-print-last-sexp' (C-j) and some edebug evaluation functions.
2114 *** The CC Mode manual has been extensively revised.
2115 The information about using CC Mode has been separated from the larger
2116 and more difficult chapters about configuration.
2118 *** Changes in Key Sequences
2119 **** c-toggle-auto-hungry-state is no longer bound to C-c C-t.
2121 **** c-toggle-hungry-state is no longer bound to C-c C-d.
2122 This binding has been taken over by c-hungry-delete-forwards.
2124 **** c-toggle-auto-state (C-c C-t) has been renamed to c-toggle-auto-newline.
2125 c-toggle-auto-state remains as an alias.
2127 **** The new commands c-hungry-backspace and c-hungry-delete-forwards
2128 have key bindings C-c C-DEL (or C-c DEL, for the benefit of TTYs) and
2129 C-c C-d (or C-c C-<delete> or C-c <delete>) respectively. These
2130 commands delete entire blocks of whitespace with a single
2131 key-sequence. [N.B. "DEL" is the <backspace> key.]
2133 **** The new command c-toggle-electric-mode is bound to C-c C-l.
2135 **** The new command c-subword-mode is bound to C-c C-w.
2137 *** C-c C-s (`c-show-syntactic-information') now highlights the anchor
2141 **** Electric Minor Mode toggles the electric action of non-alphabetic keys.
2142 The new command c-toggle-electric-mode is bound to C-c C-l. Turning the
2143 mode off can be helpful for editing chaotically indented code and for
2144 users new to CC Mode, who sometimes find electric indentation
2145 disconcerting. Its current state is displayed in the mode line with an
2148 **** Subword Minor Mode makes Emacs recognize word boundaries at upper case
2149 letters in StudlyCapsIdentifiers. You enable this feature by C-c C-w. It can
2150 also be used in non-CC Mode buffers. :-) Contributed by Masatake YAMATO.
2154 **** `comment-close-slash'.
2155 With this clean-up, a block (i.e. c-style) comment can be terminated by
2156 typing a slash at the start of a line.
2158 **** `c-one-liner-defun'
2159 This clean-up compresses a short enough defun (for example, an AWK
2160 pattern/action pair) onto a single line. "Short enough" is configurable.
2162 *** Font lock support.
2163 CC Mode now provides font lock support for all its languages. This
2164 supersedes the font lock patterns that have been in the core font lock
2165 package for C, C++, Java and Objective-C. Like indentation, font
2166 locking is done in a uniform way across all languages (except the new
2167 AWK mode - see below). That means that the new font locking will be
2168 different from the old patterns in various details for most languages.
2170 The main goal of the font locking in CC Mode is accuracy, to provide a
2171 dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like
2172 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others like
2173 declarations and types can be very tricky. CC Mode can go to great
2174 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when
2175 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly
2176 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can
2177 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the
2178 variable font-lock-maximum-decoration.
2180 Note that the most demanding font lock level has been tuned with lazy
2181 fontification in mind; Just-In-Time-Lock mode should be enabled for
2182 the highest font lock level (by default, it is). Fontifying a file
2183 with several thousand lines in one go can take the better part of a
2186 **** The (c|c++|objc|java|idl|pike)-font-lock-extra-types variables
2187 are now used by CC Mode to recognize identifiers that are certain to
2188 be types. (They are also used in cases that aren't related to font
2189 locking.) At the maximum decoration level, types are often recognized
2190 properly anyway, so these variables should be fairly restrictive and
2191 not contain patterns for uncertain types.
2193 **** Support for documentation comments.
2194 There is a "plugin" system to fontify documentation comments like
2195 Javadoc and the markup within them. It's independent of the host
2196 language, so it's possible to e.g. turn on Javadoc font locking in C
2197 buffers. See the variable c-doc-comment-style for details.
2199 Currently three kinds of doc comment styles are recognized: Sun's
2200 Javadoc, Autodoc (which is used in Pike) and GtkDoc (used in C). (The
2201 last was contributed by Masatake YAMATO). This is by no means a
2202 complete list of the most common tools; if your doc comment extractor
2203 of choice is missing then please drop a note to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org.
2205 **** Better handling of C++ templates.
2206 As a side effect of the more accurate font locking, C++ templates are
2207 now handled much better. The angle brackets that delimit them are
2208 given parenthesis syntax so that they can be navigated like other
2211 This also improves indentation of templates, although there still is
2212 work to be done in that area. E.g. it's required that multiline
2213 template clauses are written in full and then refontified to be
2214 recognized, and the indentation of nested templates is a bit odd and
2215 not as configurable as it ought to be.
2217 **** Improved handling of Objective-C and CORBA IDL.
2218 Especially the support for Objective-C and IDL has gotten an overhaul.
2219 The special "@" declarations in Objective-C are handled correctly.
2220 All the keywords used in CORBA IDL, PSDL, and CIDL are recognized and
2221 handled correctly, also wrt indentation.
2223 *** Support for the AWK language.
2224 Support for the AWK language has been introduced. The implementation is
2225 based around GNU AWK version 3.1, but it should work pretty well with
2226 any AWK. As yet, not all features of CC Mode have been adapted for AWK.
2229 **** Indentation Engine
2230 The CC Mode indentation engine fully supports AWK mode.
2232 AWK mode handles code formatted in the conventional AWK fashion: `{'s
2233 which start actions, user-defined functions, or compound statements are
2234 placed on the same line as the associated construct; the matching `}'s
2235 are normally placed under the start of the respective pattern, function
2236 definition, or structured statement.
2238 The predefined line-up functions haven't yet been adapted for AWK
2239 mode, though some of them may work serendipitously. There shouldn't
2240 be any problems writing custom indentation functions for AWK mode.
2243 There is a single level of font locking in AWK mode, rather than the
2244 three distinct levels the other modes have. There are several
2245 idiosyncrasies in AWK mode's font-locking due to the peculiarities of
2246 the AWK language itself.
2248 **** Comment and Movement Commands
2249 These commands all work for AWK buffers. The notion of "defun" has
2250 been augmented to include AWK pattern-action pairs - the standard
2251 "defun" commands on key sequences C-M-a, C-M-e, and C-M-h use this
2252 extended definition.
2254 **** "awk" style, Auto-newline Insertion and Clean-ups
2255 A new style, "awk" has been introduced, and this is now the default
2256 style for AWK code. With auto-newline enabled, the clean-up
2257 c-one-liner-defun (see above) is useful.
2259 *** New syntactic symbols in IDL mode.
2260 The top level constructs "module" and "composition" (from CIDL) are
2261 now handled like "namespace" in C++: They are given syntactic symbols
2262 module-open, module-close, inmodule, composition-open,
2263 composition-close, and incomposition.
2265 *** New functions to do hungry delete without enabling hungry delete mode.
2266 The new functions `c-hungry-backspace' and `c-hungry-delete-forward'
2267 provide hungry deletion without having to toggle a mode. They are
2268 bound to C-c C-DEL and C-c C-d (and several variants, for the benefit
2269 of different keyboard setups. See "Changes in key sequences" above).
2271 *** Better control over `require-final-newline'.
2273 The variable `c-require-final-newline' specifies which of the modes
2274 implemented by CC mode should insert final newlines. Its value is a
2275 list of modes, and only those modes should do it. By default the list
2276 includes C, C++ and Objective-C modes.
2278 Whichever modes are in this list will set `require-final-newline'
2279 based on `mode-require-final-newline'.
2281 *** Format change for syntactic context elements.
2283 The elements in the syntactic context returned by `c-guess-basic-syntax'
2284 and stored in `c-syntactic-context' has been changed somewhat to allow
2285 attaching more information. They are now lists instead of single cons
2286 cells. E.g. a line that previously had the syntactic analysis
2288 ((inclass . 11) (topmost-intro . 13))
2292 ((inclass 11) (topmost-intro 13))
2294 In some cases there are more than one position given for a syntactic
2297 This change might affect code that calls `c-guess-basic-syntax'
2298 directly, and custom lineup functions if they use
2299 `c-syntactic-context'. However, the argument given to lineup
2300 functions is still a single cons cell with nil or an integer in the
2303 *** API changes for derived modes.
2305 There have been extensive changes "under the hood" which can affect
2306 derived mode writers. Some of these changes are likely to cause
2307 incompatibilities with existing derived modes, but on the other hand
2308 care has now been taken to make it possible to extend and modify CC
2309 Mode with less risk of such problems in the future.
2311 **** New language variable system.
2312 These are variables whose values vary between CC Mode's different
2313 languages. See the comment blurb near the top of cc-langs.el.
2315 **** New initialization functions.
2316 The initialization procedure has been split up into more functions to
2317 give better control: `c-basic-common-init', `c-font-lock-init', and
2318 `c-init-language-vars'.
2320 *** Changes in analysis of nested syntactic constructs.
2321 The syntactic analysis engine has better handling of cases where
2322 several syntactic constructs appear nested on the same line. They are
2323 now handled as if each construct started on a line of its own.
2325 This means that CC Mode now indents some cases differently, and
2326 although it's more consistent there might be cases where the old way
2327 gave results that's more to one's liking. So if you find a situation
2328 where you think that the indentation has become worse, please report
2329 it to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org.
2331 **** New syntactic symbol substatement-label.
2332 This symbol is used when a label is inserted between a statement and
2333 its substatement. E.g:
2339 *** Better handling of multiline macros.
2341 **** Syntactic indentation inside macros.
2342 The contents of multiline #define's are now analyzed and indented
2343 syntactically just like other code. This can be disabled by the new
2344 variable `c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros'. A new syntactic symbol
2345 `cpp-define-intro' has been added to control the initial indentation
2348 **** New lineup function `c-lineup-cpp-define'.
2350 Now used by default to line up macro continuation lines. The behavior
2351 of this function closely mimics the indentation one gets if the macro
2352 is indented while the line continuation backslashes are temporarily
2353 removed. If syntactic indentation in macros is turned off, it works
2354 much line `c-lineup-dont-change', which was used earlier, but handles
2355 empty lines within the macro better.
2357 **** Automatically inserted newlines continues the macro if used within one.
2358 This applies to the newlines inserted by the auto-newline mode, and to
2359 `c-context-line-break' and `c-context-open-line'.
2361 **** Better alignment of line continuation backslashes.
2362 `c-backslash-region' tries to adapt to surrounding backslashes. New
2363 variable `c-backslash-max-column' puts a limit on how far out
2364 backslashes can be moved.
2366 **** Automatic alignment of line continuation backslashes.
2367 This is controlled by the new variable `c-auto-align-backslashes'. It
2368 affects `c-context-line-break', `c-context-open-line' and newlines
2369 inserted in Auto-Newline mode.
2371 **** Line indentation works better inside macros.
2372 Regardless whether syntactic indentation and syntactic indentation
2373 inside macros are enabled or not, line indentation now ignores the
2374 line continuation backslashes. This is most noticeable when syntactic
2375 indentation is turned off and there are empty lines (save for the
2376 backslash) in the macro.
2378 *** indent-for-comment is more customizable.
2379 The behavior of M-; (indent-for-comment) is now configurable through
2380 the variable `c-indent-comment-alist'. The indentation behavior is
2381 based on the preceding code on the line, e.g. to get two spaces after
2382 #else and #endif but indentation to `comment-column' in most other
2383 cases (something which was hardcoded earlier).
2385 *** New function `c-context-open-line'.
2386 It's the open-line equivalent of `c-context-line-break'.
2388 *** New lineup functions
2390 **** `c-lineup-string-cont'
2391 This lineup function lines up a continued string under the one it
2394 result = prefix + "A message "
2395 "string."; <- c-lineup-string-cont
2397 **** `c-lineup-cascaded-calls'
2398 Lines up series of calls separated by "->" or ".".
2400 **** `c-lineup-knr-region-comment'
2401 Gives (what most people think is) better indentation of comments in
2402 the "K&R region" between the function header and its body.
2404 **** `c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg'
2405 Provides better indentation inside asm blocks.
2407 **** `c-lineup-argcont'
2408 Lines up continued function arguments after the preceding comma.
2410 *** Better caching of the syntactic context.
2411 CC Mode caches the positions of the opening parentheses (of any kind)
2412 of the lists surrounding the point. Those positions are used in many
2413 places as anchor points for various searches. The cache is now
2414 improved so that it can be reused to a large extent when the point is
2415 moved. The less it moves, the less needs to be recalculated.
2417 The effect is that CC Mode should be fast most of the time even when
2418 opening parens are hung (i.e. aren't in column zero). It's typically
2419 only the first time after the point is moved far down in a complex
2420 file that it'll take noticeable time to find out the syntactic
2423 *** Statements are recognized in a more robust way.
2424 Statements are recognized most of the time even when they occur in an
2425 "invalid" context, e.g. in a function argument. In practice that can
2426 happen when macros are involved.
2428 *** Improved the way `c-indent-exp' chooses the block to indent.
2429 It now indents the block for the closest sexp following the point
2430 whose closing paren ends on a different line. This means that the
2431 point doesn't have to be immediately before the block to indent.
2432 Also, only the block and the closing line is indented; the current
2433 line is left untouched.
2435 *** Added toggle for syntactic indentation.
2436 The function `c-toggle-syntactic-indentation' can be used to toggle
2437 syntactic indentation.
2439 ** In sh-script, a continuation line is only indented if the backslash was
2440 preceded by a SPC or a TAB.
2443 ** Perl mode has a new variable `perl-indent-continued-arguments'.
2446 ** The old Octave mode bindings C-c f and C-c i have been changed
2447 to C-c C-f and C-c C-i. The C-c C-i subcommands now have duplicate
2448 bindings on control characters--thus, C-c C-i C-b is the same as
2449 C-c C-i b, and so on.
2451 ** Fortran mode changes:
2454 *** Fortran mode does more font-locking by default. Use level 3
2455 highlighting for the old default.
2458 *** Fortran mode has a new variable `fortran-directive-re'.
2459 Adapt this to match the format of any compiler directives you use.
2460 Lines that match are never indented, and are given distinctive font-locking.
2463 *** F90 mode and Fortran mode have new navigation commands
2464 `f90-end-of-block', `f90-beginning-of-block', `f90-next-block',
2465 `f90-previous-block', `fortran-end-of-block',
2466 `fortran-beginning-of-block'.
2469 *** F90 mode and Fortran mode have support for `hs-minor-mode' (hideshow).
2470 It cannot deal with every code format, but ought to handle a sizeable
2474 *** The new function `f90-backslash-not-special' can be used to change
2475 the syntax of backslashes in F90 buffers.
2478 ** Reftex mode changes
2481 *** Changes to RefTeX's table of contents
2483 The new command keys "<" and ">" in the TOC buffer promote/demote the
2484 section at point or all sections in the current region, with full
2485 support for multifile documents.
2487 The new command `reftex-toc-recenter' (`C-c -') shows the current
2488 section in the TOC buffer without selecting the TOC window.
2489 Recentering can happen automatically in idle time when the option
2490 `reftex-auto-recenter-toc' is turned on. The highlight in the TOC
2491 buffer stays when the focus moves to a different window. A dedicated
2492 frame can show the TOC with the current section always automatically
2493 highlighted. The frame is created and deleted from the toc buffer
2496 The toc window can be split off horizontally instead of vertically.
2497 See new option `reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally'.
2499 Labels can be renamed globally from the table of contents using the
2502 The new command `reftex-goto-label' jumps directly to a label
2506 *** Changes related to citations and BibTeX database files
2508 Commands that insert a citation now prompt for optional arguments when
2509 called with a prefix argument. Related new options are
2510 `reftex-cite-prompt-optional-args' and `reftex-cite-cleanup-optional-args'.
2512 The new command `reftex-create-bibtex-file' creates a BibTeX database
2513 with all entries referenced in the current document. The keys "e" and
2514 "E" allow to produce a BibTeX database file from entries marked in a
2515 citation selection buffer.
2517 The command `reftex-citation' uses the word in the buffer before the
2518 cursor as a default search string.
2520 The support for chapterbib has been improved. Different chapters can
2521 now use BibTeX or an explicit `thebibliography' environment.
2523 The macros which specify the bibliography file (like \bibliography)
2524 can be configured with the new option `reftex-bibliography-commands'.
2526 Support for jurabib has been added.
2529 *** Global index matched may be verified with a user function
2531 During global indexing, a user function can verify an index match.
2532 See new option `reftex-index-verify-function'.
2535 *** Parsing documents with many labels can be sped up.
2537 Operating in a document with thousands of labels can be sped up
2538 considerably by allowing RefTeX to derive the type of a label directly
2539 from the label prefix like `eq:' or `fig:'. The option
2540 `reftex-trust-label-prefix' needs to be configured in order to enable
2541 this feature. While the speed-up is significant, this may reduce the
2542 quality of the context offered by RefTeX to describe a label.
2545 *** Miscellaneous changes
2547 The macros which input a file in LaTeX (like \input, \include) can be
2548 configured in the new option `reftex-include-file-commands'.
2550 RefTeX supports global incremental search.
2553 ** Prolog mode has a new variable `prolog-font-lock-keywords'
2554 to support use of font-lock.
2556 ** HTML/SGML changes:
2559 *** Emacs now tries to set up buffer coding systems for HTML/XML files
2563 *** SGML mode has indentation and supports XML syntax.
2564 The new variable `sgml-xml-mode' tells SGML mode to use XML syntax.
2565 When this option is enabled, SGML tags are inserted in XML style,
2566 i.e., there is always a closing tag.
2567 By default, its setting is inferred on a buffer-by-buffer basis
2568 from the file name or buffer contents.
2571 *** `xml-mode' is now an alias for `sgml-mode', which has XML support.
2576 *** C-c C-c prompts for a command to run, and tries to offer a good default.
2579 *** The user option `tex-start-options-string' has been replaced
2580 by two new user options: `tex-start-options', which should hold
2581 command-line options to feed to TeX, and `tex-start-commands' which should hold
2582 TeX commands to use at startup.
2585 *** verbatim environments are now highlighted in courier by font-lock
2586 and super/sub-scripts are made into super/sub-scripts.
2589 *** New major mode Doctex mode, for *.dtx files.
2593 *** The new command `bibtex-url' browses a URL for the BibTeX entry at
2594 point (bound to C-c C-l and mouse-2, RET on clickable fields).
2596 *** The new command `bibtex-entry-update' (bound to C-c C-u) updates
2597 an existing BibTeX entry by inserting fields that may occur but are not
2600 *** New `bibtex-entry-format' option `required-fields', enabled by default.
2602 *** `bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries' can take values `plain',
2603 `crossref', and `entry-class' which control the sorting scheme used
2604 for BibTeX entries. `bibtex-sort-entry-class' controls the sorting
2605 scheme `entry-class'. TAB completion for reference keys and
2606 automatic detection of duplicates does not require anymore that
2607 `bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries' is non-nil.
2609 *** If the new variable `bibtex-parse-keys-fast' is non-nil,
2610 use fast but simplified algorithm for parsing BibTeX keys.
2612 *** If the new variable `bibtex-autoadd-commas' is non-nil,
2613 automatically add missing commas at end of BibTeX fields.
2615 *** The new variable `bibtex-autofill-types' contains a list of entry
2616 types for which fields are filled automatically (if possible).
2618 *** The new command `bibtex-complete' completes word fragment before
2619 point according to context (bound to M-tab).
2621 *** The new commands `bibtex-find-entry' and `bibtex-find-crossref'
2622 locate entries and crossref'd entries (bound to C-c C-s and C-c C-x).
2623 Crossref fields are clickable (bound to mouse-2, RET).
2625 *** In BibTeX mode the command `fill-paragraph' (M-q) fills
2626 individual fields of a BibTeX entry.
2628 *** The new variables `bibtex-files' and `bibtex-file-path' define a set
2629 of BibTeX files that are searched for entry keys.
2631 *** The new command `bibtex-validate-globally' checks for duplicate keys
2632 in multiple BibTeX files.
2634 *** The new command `bibtex-copy-summary-as-kill' pushes summary
2635 of BibTeX entry to kill ring (bound to C-c C-t).
2637 *** The new variables bibtex-expand-strings and
2638 bibtex-autokey-expand-strings control the expansion of strings when
2639 extracting the content of a BibTeX field.
2641 *** The variables `bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert' and
2642 `bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert' have been renamed to
2643 `bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert-function' and
2644 `bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert-function'. The old names are
2645 still available as aliases.
2648 ** In Enriched mode, `set-left-margin' and `set-right-margin' are now
2649 by default bound to `C-c [' and `C-c ]' instead of the former `C-c C-l'
2655 *** In GUD mode, when talking to GDB, C-x C-a C-j "jumps" the program
2656 counter to the specified source line (the one where point is).
2659 *** GUD mode has its own tool bar for controlling execution of the inferior
2660 and other common debugger commands.
2663 *** The new package gdb-ui.el provides an enhanced graphical interface to
2664 GDB. You can interact with GDB through the GUD buffer in the usual way, but
2665 there are also further buffers which control the execution and describe the
2666 state of your program. It can separate the input/output of your program from
2667 that of GDB and watches expressions in the speedbar. It also uses features of
2668 Emacs 21/22 such as the toolbar, and bitmaps in the fringe to indicate
2671 To use this package just type M-x gdb. See the Emacs manual if you want the
2674 *** The variable tooltip-gud-tips-p has been removed. GUD tooltips can now be
2675 toggled independently of normal tooltips with the minor mode
2679 *** In graphical mode, with a C program, GUD Tooltips have been extended to
2680 display the #define directive associated with an identifier when program is
2684 ** GUD mode improvements for jdb:
2686 *** Search for source files using jdb classpath and class information.
2687 Fast startup since there is no need to scan all source files up front.
2688 There is also no need to create and maintain lists of source
2689 directories to scan. Look at `gud-jdb-use-classpath' and
2690 `gud-jdb-classpath' customization variables documentation.
2692 *** Supports the standard breakpoint (gud-break, gud-clear)
2693 set/clear operations from Java source files under the classpath, stack
2694 traversal (gud-up, gud-down), and run until current stack finish
2697 *** Supports new jdb (Java 1.2 and later) in addition to oldjdb
2700 *** The previous method of searching for source files has been
2701 preserved in case someone still wants/needs to use it.
2702 Set `gud-jdb-use-classpath' to nil.
2704 *** Added Customization Variables
2706 **** `gud-jdb-command-name'. What command line to use to invoke jdb.
2708 **** `gud-jdb-use-classpath'. Allows selection of java source file searching
2709 method: set to t for new method, nil to scan `gud-jdb-directories' for
2710 java sources (previous method).
2712 **** `gud-jdb-directories'. List of directories to scan and search for Java
2713 classes using the original gud-jdb method (if `gud-jdb-use-classpath'
2716 *** Minor Improvements
2718 **** The STARTTLS wrapper (starttls.el) can now use GNUTLS
2719 instead of the OpenSSL based `starttls' tool. For backwards
2720 compatibility, it prefers `starttls', but you can toggle
2721 `starttls-use-gnutls' to switch to GNUTLS (or simply remove the
2724 **** Do not allow debugger output history variable to grow without bounds.
2726 ** Auto-Revert changes:
2729 *** You can now use Auto Revert mode to `tail' a file.
2731 If point is at the end of a file buffer before reverting, Auto Revert
2732 mode keeps it at the end after reverting. Similarly if point is
2733 displayed at the end of a file buffer in any window, it stays at
2734 the end of the buffer in that window. This allows to tail a file:
2735 just put point at the end of the buffer and it stays there. This
2736 rule applies to file buffers. For non-file buffers, the behavior can
2739 If you are sure that the file will only change by growing at the end,
2740 then you can tail the file more efficiently by using the new minor
2741 mode Auto Revert Tail mode. The function `auto-revert-tail-mode'
2745 *** Auto Revert mode is now more careful to avoid excessive reverts and
2746 other potential problems when deciding which non-file buffers to
2747 revert. This matters especially if Global Auto Revert mode is enabled
2748 and `global-auto-revert-non-file-buffers' is non-nil. Auto Revert
2749 mode only reverts a non-file buffer if the buffer has a non-nil
2750 `revert-buffer-function' and a non-nil `buffer-stale-function', which
2751 decides whether the buffer should be reverted. Currently, this means
2752 that auto reverting works for Dired buffers (although this may not
2753 work properly on all operating systems) and for the Buffer Menu.
2756 *** If the new user option `auto-revert-check-vc-info' is non-nil, Auto
2757 Revert mode reliably updates version control info (such as the version
2758 control number in the mode line), in all version controlled buffers in
2759 which it is active. If the option is nil, the default, then this info
2760 only gets updated whenever the buffer gets reverted.
2765 The recent file list is now automatically cleaned up when recentf mode is
2766 enabled. The new option `recentf-auto-cleanup' controls when to do
2769 The ten most recent files can be quickly opened by using the shortcut
2770 keys 1 to 9, and 0, when the recent list is displayed in a buffer via
2771 the `recentf-open-files', or `recentf-open-more-files' commands.
2773 The `recentf-keep' option replaces `recentf-keep-non-readable-files-p'
2774 and provides a more general mechanism to customize which file names to
2775 keep in the recent list.
2777 With the more advanced option `recentf-filename-handlers', you can
2778 specify functions that successively transform recent file names. For
2779 example, if set to `file-truename' plus `abbreviate-file-name', the
2780 same file will not be in the recent list with different symbolic
2781 links, and the file name will be abbreviated.
2783 To follow naming convention, `recentf-menu-append-commands-flag'
2784 replaces the misnamed option `recentf-menu-append-commands-p'. The
2785 old name remains available as alias, but has been marked obsolete.
2791 *** Desktop saving is now a minor mode, `desktop-save-mode'.
2794 *** The variable `desktop-enable' is obsolete.
2796 Customize `desktop-save-mode' to enable desktop saving.
2799 *** Buffers are saved in the desktop file in the same order as that in the
2803 *** The desktop package can be customized to restore only some buffers
2804 immediately, remaining buffers are restored lazily (when Emacs is
2809 - desktop-revert reverts to the last loaded desktop.
2810 - desktop-change-dir kills current desktop and loads a new.
2811 - desktop-save-in-desktop-dir saves desktop in the directory from which
2813 - desktop-lazy-complete runs the desktop load to completion.
2814 - desktop-lazy-abort aborts lazy loading of the desktop.
2817 *** New customizable variables:
2818 - desktop-save. Determines whether the desktop should be saved when it is
2820 - desktop-file-name-format. Format in which desktop file names should be saved.
2821 - desktop-path. List of directories in which to lookup the desktop file.
2822 - desktop-locals-to-save. List of local variables to save.
2823 - desktop-globals-to-clear. List of global variables that `desktop-clear' will clear.
2824 - desktop-clear-preserve-buffers-regexp. Regexp identifying buffers that `desktop-clear'
2826 - desktop-restore-eager. Number of buffers to restore immediately. Remaining buffers are
2827 restored lazily (when Emacs is idle).
2828 - desktop-lazy-verbose. Verbose reporting of lazily created buffers.
2829 - desktop-lazy-idle-delay. Idle delay before starting to create buffers.
2832 *** New command line option --no-desktop
2836 - desktop-after-read-hook run after a desktop is loaded.
2837 - desktop-no-desktop-file-hook run when no desktop file is found.
2840 ** The saveplace.el package now filters out unreadable files.
2842 When you exit Emacs, the saved positions in visited files no longer
2843 include files that aren't readable, e.g. files that don't exist.
2844 Customize the new option `save-place-forget-unreadable-files' to nil
2845 to get the old behavior. The new options `save-place-save-skipped'
2846 and `save-place-skip-check-regexp' allow further fine-tuning of this
2852 *** When comparing directories.
2853 Typing D brings up a buffer that lists the differences between the contents of
2854 directories. Now it is possible to use this buffer to copy the missing files
2855 from one directory to another.
2858 *** When comparing files or buffers.
2859 Typing the = key now offers to perform the word-by-word comparison of the
2860 currently highlighted regions in an inferior Ediff session. If you answer 'n'
2861 then it reverts to the old behavior and asks the user to select regions for
2865 *** The new command `ediff-backup' compares a file with its most recent
2866 backup using `ediff'. If you specify the name of a backup file,
2867 `ediff-backup' compares it with the file of which it is a backup.
2872 *** New regular expressions features
2874 **** New syntax for regular expressions, multi-line regular expressions.
2876 The syntax --ignore-case-regexp=/regex/ is now undocumented and retained
2877 only for backward compatibility. The new equivalent syntax is
2878 --regex=/regex/i. More generally, it is --regex=/TAGREGEX/TAGNAME/MODS,
2879 where `/TAGNAME' is optional, as usual, and MODS is a string of 0 or
2880 more characters among `i' (ignore case), `m' (multi-line) and `s'
2881 (single-line). The `m' and `s' modifiers behave as in Perl regular
2882 expressions: `m' allows regexps to match more than one line, while `s'
2883 (which implies `m') means that `.' matches newlines. The ability to
2884 span newlines allows writing of much more powerful regular expressions
2885 and rapid prototyping for tagging new languages.
2887 **** Regular expressions can use char escape sequences as in GCC.
2889 The escaped character sequence \a, \b, \d, \e, \f, \n, \r, \t, \v,
2890 respectively, stand for the ASCII characters BEL, BS, DEL, ESC, FF, NL,
2893 **** Regular expressions can be bound to a given language.
2895 The syntax --regex={LANGUAGE}REGEX means that REGEX is used to make tags
2896 only for files of language LANGUAGE, and ignored otherwise. This is
2897 particularly useful when storing regexps in a file.
2899 **** Regular expressions can be read from a file.
2901 The --regex=@regexfile option means read the regexps from a file, one
2902 per line. Lines beginning with space or tab are ignored.
2904 *** New language parsing features
2906 **** The `::' qualifier triggers C++ parsing in C file.
2908 Previously, only the `template' and `class' keywords had this effect.
2910 **** The GCC __attribute__ keyword is now recognized and ignored.
2912 **** New language HTML.
2914 Tags are generated for `title' as well as `h1', `h2', and `h3'. Also,
2915 when `name=' is used inside an anchor and whenever `id=' is used.
2917 **** In Makefiles, constants are tagged.
2919 If you want the old behavior instead, thus avoiding to increase the
2920 size of the tags file, use the --no-globals option.
2922 **** New language Lua.
2924 All functions are tagged.
2926 **** In Perl, packages are tags.
2928 Subroutine tags are named from their package. You can jump to sub tags
2929 as you did before, by the sub name, or additionally by looking for
2932 **** In Prolog, etags creates tags for rules in addition to predicates.
2934 **** New language PHP.
2936 Functions, classes and defines are tags. If the --members option is
2937 specified to etags, variables are tags also.
2939 **** New default keywords for TeX.
2941 The new keywords are def, newcommand, renewcommand, newenvironment and
2944 *** Honor #line directives.
2946 When Etags parses an input file that contains C preprocessor's #line
2947 directives, it creates tags using the file name and line number
2948 specified in those directives. This is useful when dealing with code
2949 created from Cweb source files. When Etags tags the generated file, it
2950 writes tags pointing to the source file.
2952 *** New option --parse-stdin=FILE.
2954 This option is mostly useful when calling etags from programs. It can
2955 be used (only once) in place of a file name on the command line. Etags
2956 reads from standard input and marks the produced tags as belonging to
2962 *** The key C-x C-q only changes the read-only state of the buffer
2963 (toggle-read-only). It no longer checks files in or out.
2965 We made this change because we held a poll and found that many users
2966 were unhappy with the previous behavior. If you do prefer this
2967 behavior, you can bind `vc-toggle-read-only' to C-x C-q in your
2970 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-q" 'vc-toggle-read-only)
2972 The function `vc-toggle-read-only' will continue to exist.
2975 *** The new variable `vc-cvs-global-switches' specifies switches that
2976 are passed to any CVS command invoked by VC.
2978 These switches are used as "global options" for CVS, which means they
2979 are inserted before the command name. For example, this allows you to
2980 specify a compression level using the `-z#' option for CVS.
2983 *** New backends for Subversion and Meta-CVS.
2986 *** VC-Annotate mode enhancements
2988 In VC-Annotate mode, you can now use the following key bindings for
2989 enhanced functionality to browse the annotations of past revisions, or
2990 to view diffs or log entries directly from vc-annotate-mode:
2992 P: annotates the previous revision
2993 N: annotates the next revision
2994 J: annotates the revision at line
2995 A: annotates the revision previous to line
2996 D: shows the diff of the revision at line with its previous revision
2997 L: shows the log of the revision at line
2998 W: annotates the workfile (most up to date) version
3003 *** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d y' command to view the diffs
3004 between the local version of the file and yesterday's head revision
3008 *** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d r' command to view the changes
3009 anyone has committed to the repository since you last executed
3010 `checkout', `update' or `commit'. That means using cvs diff options
3014 ** The new variable `mail-default-directory' specifies
3015 `default-directory' for mail buffers. This directory is used for
3016 auto-save files of mail buffers. It defaults to "~/".
3019 ** The mode line can indicate new mail in a directory or file.
3021 See the documentation of the user option
3022 `display-time-mail-directory'.
3027 *** Rmail now displays 5-digit message ids in its summary buffer.
3029 *** The new commands rmail-end-of-message and rmail-summary end-of-message,
3030 by default bound to `/', go to the end of the current mail message in
3031 Rmail and Rmail summary buffers.
3034 *** Support for `movemail' from GNU mailutils was added to Rmail.
3036 This version of `movemail' allows to read mail from a wide range of
3037 mailbox formats, including remote POP3 and IMAP4 mailboxes with or
3038 without TLS encryption. If GNU mailutils is installed on the system
3039 and its version of `movemail' can be found in exec-path, it will be
3040 used instead of the native one.
3045 *** Gnus now includes Sieve and PGG
3047 Sieve is a library for managing Sieve scripts. PGG is a library to handle
3051 *** There are many news features, bug fixes and improvements.
3053 See the file GNUS-NEWS or the node "Oort Gnus" in the Gnus manual for details.
3058 Upgraded to MH-E version 7.95. There have been major changes since
3059 version 5.0.2; see MH-E-NEWS for details.
3061 ** Calendar changes:
3064 *** You can now use < and >, instead of C-x < and C-x >, to scroll
3065 the calendar left or right. (The old key bindings still work too.)
3068 *** There is a new calendar package, icalendar.el, that can be used to
3069 convert Emacs diary entries to/from the iCalendar format.
3072 *** Diary sexp entries can have custom marking in the calendar.
3073 Diary sexp functions which only apply to certain days (such as
3074 `diary-block' or `diary-cyclic') now take an optional parameter MARK,
3075 which is the name of a face or a single-character string indicating
3076 how to highlight the day in the calendar display. Specifying a
3077 single-character string as @var{mark} places the character next to the
3078 day in the calendar. Specifying a face highlights the day with that
3079 face. This lets you have different colors or markings for vacations,
3080 appointments, paydays or anything else using a sexp.
3083 *** The new function `calendar-goto-day-of-year' (g D) prompts for a
3084 year and day number, and moves to that date. Negative day numbers
3085 count backward from the end of the year.
3088 *** The new Calendar function `calendar-goto-iso-week' (g w)
3089 prompts for a year and a week number, and moves to the first
3090 day of that ISO week.
3093 *** The new variable `calendar-minimum-window-height' affects the
3094 window generated by the function `generate-calendar-window'.
3097 *** The functions `holiday-easter-etc' and `holiday-advent' now take
3098 optional arguments, in order to only report on the specified holiday
3099 rather than all. This makes customization of variables such as
3100 `christian-holidays' simpler.
3103 *** The function `simple-diary-display' now by default sets a header line.
3104 This can be controlled through the variables `diary-header-line-flag'
3105 and `diary-header-line-format'.
3108 *** The procedure for activating appointment reminders has changed:
3109 use the new function `appt-activate'. The new variable
3110 `appt-display-format' controls how reminders are displayed, replacing
3111 `appt-issue-message', `appt-visible', and `appt-msg-window'.
3114 *** The new functions `diary-from-outlook', `diary-from-outlook-gnus',
3115 and `diary-from-outlook-rmail' can be used to import diary entries
3116 from Outlook-format appointments in mail messages. The variable
3117 `diary-outlook-formats' can be customized to recognize additional
3121 ** Speedbar changes:
3123 *** Speedbar items can now be selected by clicking mouse-1, based on
3124 the `mouse-1-click-follows-link' mechanism.
3126 *** SPC and DEL are no longer bound to scroll up/down in the speedbar
3129 *** The new command `speedbar-toggle-line-expansion', bound to SPC,
3130 contracts or expands the line under the cursor.
3132 *** New command `speedbar-create-directory', bound to `M'.
3134 *** The new commands `speedbar-expand-line-descendants' and
3135 `speedbar-contract-line-descendants', bound to `[' and `]'
3136 respectively, expand and contract the line under cursor with all of
3139 *** The new user option `speedbar-query-confirmation-method' controls
3140 how querying is performed for file operations. A value of 'always
3141 means to always query before file operations; 'none-but-delete means
3142 to not query before any file operations, except before a file
3145 *** The new user option `speedbar-select-frame-method' specifies how
3146 to select a frame for displaying a file opened with the speedbar. A
3147 value of 'attached means to use the attached frame (the frame that
3148 speedbar was started from.) A number such as 1 or -1 means to pass
3149 that number to `other-frame'.
3151 *** The new user option `speedbar-use-tool-tips-flag', if non-nil,
3152 means to display tool-tips for speedbar items.
3154 *** The frame management code in speedbar.el has been split into a new
3155 `dframe' library. Emacs Lisp code that makes use of the speedbar
3156 should use `dframe-attached-frame' instead of
3157 `speedbar-attached-frame', `dframe-timer' instead of `speedbar-timer',
3158 `dframe-close-frame' instead of `speedbar-close-frame', and
3159 `dframe-activity-change-focus-flag' instead of
3160 `speedbar-activity-change-focus-flag'. The variables
3161 `speedbar-update-speed' and `speedbar-navigating-speed' are also
3162 obsolete; use `dframe-update-speed' instead.
3167 *** The variable `sql-product' controls the highlighting of different
3168 SQL dialects. This variable can be set globally via Customize, on a
3169 buffer-specific basis via local variable settings, or for the current
3170 session using the new SQL->Product submenu. (This menu replaces the
3171 SQL->Highlighting submenu.)
3173 The following values are supported:
3175 ansi ANSI Standard (default)
3189 The current product name will be shown on the mode line following the
3192 The technique of setting `sql-mode-font-lock-defaults' directly in
3193 your `.emacs' will no longer establish the default highlighting -- Use
3194 `sql-product' to accomplish this.
3196 ANSI keywords are always highlighted.
3198 *** The function `sql-add-product-keywords' can be used to add
3199 font-lock rules to the product specific rules. For example, to have
3200 all identifiers ending in `_t' under MS SQLServer treated as a type,
3201 you would use the following line in your .emacs file:
3203 (sql-add-product-keywords 'ms
3204 '(("\\<\\w+_t\\>" . font-lock-type-face)))
3206 *** Oracle support includes keyword highlighting for Oracle 9i.
3208 Most SQL and PL/SQL keywords are implemented. SQL*Plus commands are
3209 highlighted in `font-lock-doc-face'.
3211 *** Microsoft SQLServer support has been significantly improved.
3213 Keyword highlighting for SqlServer 2000 is implemented.
3214 sql-interactive-mode defaults to use osql, rather than isql, because
3215 osql flushes its error stream more frequently. Thus error messages
3216 are displayed when they occur rather than when the session is
3219 If the username and password are not provided to `sql-ms', osql is
3220 called with the `-E' command line argument to use the operating system
3221 credentials to authenticate the user.
3223 *** Postgres support is enhanced.
3224 Keyword highlighting of Postgres 7.3 is implemented. Prompting for
3225 the username and the pgsql `-U' option is added.
3227 *** MySQL support is enhanced.
3228 Keyword highlighting of MySql 4.0 is implemented.
3230 *** Imenu support has been enhanced to locate tables, views, indexes,
3231 packages, procedures, functions, triggers, sequences, rules, and
3234 *** Added SQL->Start SQLi Session menu entry which calls the
3235 appropriate `sql-interactive-mode' wrapper for the current setting of
3239 *** sql.el supports the SQLite interpreter--call 'sql-sqlite'.
3244 *** New ffap commands and keybindings:
3246 C-x C-r (`ffap-read-only'),
3247 C-x C-v (`ffap-alternate-file'), C-x C-d (`ffap-list-directory'),
3248 C-x 4 r (`ffap-read-only-other-window'), C-x 4 d (`ffap-dired-other-window'),
3249 C-x 5 r (`ffap-read-only-other-frame'), C-x 5 d (`ffap-dired-other-frame').
3252 *** FFAP accepts wildcards in a file name by default.
3254 C-x C-f passes the file name to `find-file' with non-nil WILDCARDS
3255 argument, which visits multiple files, and C-x d passes it to `dired'.
3258 ** In skeleton.el, `-' marks the `skeleton-point' without interregion interaction.
3260 `@' has reverted to only setting `skeleton-positions' and no longer
3261 sets `skeleton-point'. Skeletons which used @ to mark
3262 `skeleton-point' independent of `_' should now use `-' instead. The
3263 updated `skeleton-insert' docstring explains these new features along
3264 with other details of skeleton construction.
3267 ** Hideshow mode changes
3269 *** New variable `hs-set-up-overlay' allows customization of the overlay
3270 used to effect hiding for hideshow minor mode. Integration with isearch
3271 handles the overlay property `display' specially, preserving it during
3272 temporary overlay showing in the course of an isearch operation.
3274 *** New variable `hs-allow-nesting' non-nil means that hiding a block does
3275 not discard the hidden state of any "internal" blocks; when the parent
3276 block is later shown, the internal blocks remain hidden. Default is nil.
3279 ** `hide-ifdef-mode' now uses overlays rather than selective-display
3280 to hide its text. This should be mostly transparent but slightly
3281 changes the behavior of motion commands like C-e and C-p.
3284 ** `partial-completion-mode' now handles partial completion on directory names.
3287 ** The type-break package now allows `type-break-file-name' to be nil
3288 and if so, doesn't store any data across sessions. This is handy if
3289 you don't want the `.type-break' file in your home directory or are
3290 annoyed by the need for interaction when you kill Emacs.
3293 ** `ps-print' can now print characters from the mule-unicode charsets.
3295 Printing text with characters from the mule-unicode-* sets works with
3296 `ps-print', provided that you have installed the appropriate BDF
3297 fonts. See the file INSTALL for URLs where you can find these fonts.
3300 ** New command `strokes-global-set-stroke-string'.
3301 This is like `strokes-global-set-stroke', but it allows you to bind
3302 the stroke directly to a string to insert. This is convenient for
3303 using strokes as an input method.
3305 ** Emacs server changes:
3308 *** You can have several Emacs servers on the same machine.
3310 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "foo")' -f server-start &
3311 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "bar")' -f server-start &
3312 % emacsclient -s foo file1
3313 % emacsclient -s bar file2
3316 *** The `emacsclient' command understands the options `--eval' and
3317 `--display' which tell Emacs respectively to evaluate the given Lisp
3318 expression and to use the given display when visiting files.
3321 *** User option `server-mode' can be used to start a server process.
3324 ** LDAP support now defaults to ldapsearch from OpenLDAP version 2.
3327 ** You can now disable pc-selection-mode after enabling it.
3329 M-x pc-selection-mode behaves like a proper minor mode, and with no
3330 argument it toggles the mode. Turning off PC-Selection mode restores
3331 the global key bindings that were replaced by turning on the mode.
3334 ** `uniquify-strip-common-suffix' tells uniquify to prefer
3335 `file|dir1' and `file|dir2' to `file|dir1/subdir' and `file|dir2/subdir'.
3338 ** Support for `magic cookie' standout modes has been removed.
3340 Emacs still works on terminals that require magic cookies in order to
3341 use standout mode, but they can no longer display mode-lines in
3345 ** The game `mpuz' is enhanced.
3347 `mpuz' now allows the 2nd factor not to have two identical digits. By
3348 default, all trivial operations involving whole lines are performed
3349 automatically. The game uses faces for better visual feedback.
3351 ** battery.el changes:
3354 *** display-battery-mode replaces display-battery.
3357 *** battery.el now works on recent versions of OS X.
3360 ** calculator.el now has radix grouping mode.
3362 To enable this, set `calculator-output-radix' non-nil. In this mode a
3363 separator character is used every few digits, making it easier to see
3364 byte boundaries etc. For more info, see the documentation of the
3365 variable `calculator-radix-grouping-mode'.
3368 ** fast-lock.el and lazy-lock.el are obsolete. Use jit-lock.el instead.
3371 ** iso-acc.el is now obsolete. Use one of the latin input methods instead.
3374 ** cplus-md.el has been deleted.
3376 * Changes in Emacs 22.1 on non-free operating systems
3379 ** The HOME directory defaults to Application Data under the user profile.
3381 If you used a previous version of Emacs without setting the HOME
3382 environment variable and a `.emacs' was saved, then Emacs will continue
3383 using C:/ as the default HOME. But if you are installing Emacs afresh,
3384 the default location will be the "Application Data" (or similar
3385 localized name) subdirectory of your user profile. A typical location
3386 of this directory is "C:\Documents and Settings\USERNAME\Application Data",
3387 where USERNAME is your user name.
3389 This change means that users can now have their own `.emacs' files on
3390 shared computers, and the default HOME directory is less likely to be
3391 read-only on computers that are administered by someone else.
3394 ** Passing resources on the command line now works on MS Windows.
3396 You can use --xrm to pass resource settings to Emacs, overriding any
3397 existing values. For example:
3399 emacs --xrm "Emacs.Background:red" --xrm "Emacs.Geometry:100x20"
3401 will start up Emacs on an initial frame of 100x20 with red background,
3402 irrespective of geometry or background setting on the Windows registry.
3405 ** On MS Windows, the "system caret" now follows the cursor.
3407 This enables Emacs to work better with programs that need to track
3408 the cursor, for example screen magnifiers and text to speech programs.
3411 ** Tooltips now work on MS Windows.
3413 See the Emacs 21.1 NEWS entry for tooltips for details.
3416 ** Images are now supported on MS Windows.
3418 PBM and XBM images are supported out of the box. Other image formats
3419 depend on external libraries. All of these libraries have been ported
3420 to Windows, and can be found in both source and binary form at
3421 http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/. Note that libpng also depends on
3422 zlib, and tiff depends on the version of jpeg that it was compiled
3423 against. For additional information, see nt/INSTALL.
3426 ** Sound is now supported on MS Windows.
3428 WAV format is supported on all versions of Windows, other formats such
3429 as AU, AIFF and MP3 may be supported in the more recent versions of
3430 Windows, or when other software provides hooks into the system level
3431 sound support for those formats.
3434 ** Different shaped mouse pointers are supported on MS Windows.
3436 The mouse pointer changes shape depending on what is under the pointer.
3439 ** Pointing devices with more than 3 buttons are now supported on MS Windows.
3441 The new variable `w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system' controls
3442 whether Emacs should handle the extra buttons itself (the default), or
3443 pass them to Windows to be handled with system-wide functions.
3446 ** Emacs takes note of colors defined in Control Panel on MS-Windows.
3448 The Control Panel defines some default colors for applications in much
3449 the same way as wildcard X Resources do on X. Emacs now adds these
3450 colors to the colormap prefixed by System (eg SystemMenu for the
3451 default Menu background, SystemMenuText for the foreground), and uses
3452 some of them to initialize some of the default faces.
3453 `list-colors-display' shows the list of System color names, in case
3454 you wish to use them in other faces.
3457 ** On MS Windows NT/W2K/XP, Emacs uses Unicode for clipboard operations.
3459 Those systems use Unicode internally, so this allows Emacs to share
3460 multilingual text with other applications. On other versions of
3461 MS Windows, Emacs now uses the appropriate locale coding-system, so
3462 the clipboard should work correctly for your local language without
3466 ** Running in a console window in Windows now uses the console size.
3468 Previous versions of Emacs erred on the side of having a usable Emacs
3469 through telnet, even though that was inconvenient if you use Emacs in
3470 a local console window with a scrollback buffer. The default value of
3471 w32-use-full-screen-buffer is now nil, which favors local console
3472 windows. Recent versions of Windows telnet also work well with this
3473 setting. If you are using an older telnet server then Emacs detects
3474 that the console window dimensions that are reported are not sane, and
3475 defaults to 80x25. If you use such a telnet server regularly at a size
3476 other than 80x25, you can still manually set
3477 w32-use-full-screen-buffer to t.
3480 ** On Mac OS, `keyboard-coding-system' changes based on the keyboard script.
3483 ** The variable `mac-keyboard-text-encoding' and the constants
3484 `kTextEncodingMacRoman', `kTextEncodingISOLatin1', and
3485 `kTextEncodingISOLatin2' are obsolete.
3487 ** The variable `mac-command-key-is-meta' is obsolete. Use
3488 `mac-command-modifier' and `mac-option-modifier' instead.
3490 * Incompatible Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1
3493 ** The variables post-command-idle-hook and post-command-idle-delay have
3494 been removed. Use run-with-idle-timer instead.
3497 ** `suppress-keymap' now works by remapping `self-insert-command' to
3498 the command `undefined'. (In earlier Emacs versions, it used
3499 `substitute-key-definition' to rebind self inserting characters to
3503 ** Mode line display ignores text properties as well as the
3504 :propertize and :eval forms in the value of a variable whose
3505 `risky-local-variable' property is nil.
3508 The function `comint-send-input' now accepts 3 optional arguments:
3510 (comint-send-input &optional no-newline artificial)
3512 Callers sending input not from the user should use bind the 3rd
3513 argument `artificial' to a non-nil value, to prevent Emacs from
3514 deleting the part of subprocess output that matches the input.
3517 ** Support for Mocklisp has been removed.
3520 ** The variable `memory-full' now remains t until
3521 there is no longer a shortage of memory.
3523 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1
3525 ** General Lisp changes:
3527 *** The function `expt' handles negative exponents differently.
3528 The value for `(expt A B)', if both A and B are integers and B is
3529 negative, is now a float. For example: (expt 2 -2) => 0.25.
3532 *** The function `eql' is now available without requiring the CL package.
3535 *** `makehash' is now obsolete. Use `make-hash-table' instead.
3538 *** `add-to-list' takes an optional third argument, APPEND.
3540 If APPEND is non-nil, the new element gets added at the end of the
3541 list instead of at the beginning. This change actually occurred in
3542 Emacs 21.1, but was not documented then.
3545 *** New function `add-to-ordered-list' is like `add-to-list' but
3546 associates a numeric ordering of each element added to the list.
3549 *** New function `copy-tree' makes a copy of a tree.
3551 It recursively copies through both CARs and CDRs.
3554 *** New function `delete-dups' deletes `equal' duplicate elements from a list.
3556 It modifies the list destructively, like `delete'. Of several `equal'
3557 occurrences of an element in the list, the one that's kept is the
3561 *** New function `rassq-delete-all'.
3563 (rassq-delete-all VALUE ALIST) deletes, from ALIST, each element whose
3564 CDR is `eq' to the specified value.
3567 *** The function `number-sequence' makes a list of equally-separated numbers.
3569 For instance, (number-sequence 4 9) returns (4 5 6 7 8 9). By
3570 default, the separation is 1, but you can specify a different
3571 separation as the third argument. (number-sequence 1.5 6 2) returns
3575 *** New variables `most-positive-fixnum' and `most-negative-fixnum'.
3577 They hold the largest and smallest possible integer values.
3580 *** Minor change in the function `format'.
3582 Some flags that were accepted but not implemented (such as "*") are no
3586 *** Functions `get' and `plist-get' no longer give errors for bad plists.
3588 They return nil for a malformed property list or if the list is
3592 *** New functions `lax-plist-get' and `lax-plist-put'.
3594 They are like `plist-get' and `plist-put', except that they compare
3595 the property name using `equal' rather than `eq'.
3598 *** New variable `print-continuous-numbering'.
3600 When this is non-nil, successive calls to print functions use a single
3601 numbering scheme for circular structure references. This is only
3602 relevant when `print-circle' is non-nil.
3604 When you bind `print-continuous-numbering' to t, you should
3605 also bind `print-number-table' to nil.
3608 *** New function `macroexpand-all' expands all macros in a form.
3610 It is similar to the Common-Lisp function of the same name.
3611 One difference is that it guarantees to return the original argument
3612 if no expansion is done, which can be tested using `eq'.
3615 *** The function `atan' now accepts an optional second argument.
3617 When called with 2 arguments, as in `(atan Y X)', `atan' returns the
3618 angle in radians between the vector [X, Y] and the X axis. (This is
3619 equivalent to the standard C library function `atan2'.)
3622 *** A function or macro's doc string can now specify the calling pattern.
3624 You put this info in the doc string's last line. It should be
3625 formatted so as to match the regexp "\n\n(fn .*)\\'". If you don't
3626 specify this explicitly, Emacs determines it from the actual argument
3627 names. Usually that default is right, but not always.
3630 *** New macro `with-local-quit' temporarily allows quitting.
3632 A quit inside the body of `with-local-quit' is caught by the
3633 `with-local-quit' form itself, but another quit will happen later once
3634 the code that has inhibited quitting exits.
3636 This is for use around potentially blocking or long-running code
3637 inside timer functions and `post-command-hook' functions.
3640 *** New macro `define-obsolete-function-alias'.
3642 This combines `defalias' and `make-obsolete'.
3645 *** New function `unsafep' determines whether a Lisp form is safe.
3647 It returns nil if the given Lisp form can't possibly do anything
3648 dangerous; otherwise it returns a reason why the form might be unsafe
3649 (calls unknown function, alters global variable, etc.).
3652 *** New macro `eval-at-startup' specifies expressions to
3653 evaluate when Emacs starts up. If this is done after startup,
3654 it evaluates those expressions immediately.
3656 This is useful in packages that can be preloaded.
3658 *** `list-faces-display' takes an optional argument, REGEXP.
3660 If it is non-nil, the function lists only faces matching this regexp.
3663 *** New functions `string-or-null-p' and `booleanp'.
3665 `string-or-null-p' returns non-nil iff OBJECT is a string or nil.
3666 `booleanp' returns non-nil iff OBJECT is a t or nil.
3668 ** Lisp code indentation features:
3671 *** The `defmacro' form can contain indentation and edebug declarations.
3673 These declarations specify how to indent the macro calls in Lisp mode
3674 and how to debug them with Edebug. You write them like this:
3676 (defmacro NAME LAMBDA-LIST [DOC-STRING] [DECLARATION ...] ...)
3678 DECLARATION is a list `(declare DECLARATION-SPECIFIER ...)'. The
3679 possible declaration specifiers are:
3682 Set NAME's `lisp-indent-function' property to INDENT.
3685 Set NAME's `edebug-form-spec' property to DEBUG. (This is
3686 equivalent to writing a `def-edebug-spec' for the macro,
3687 but this is cleaner.)
3690 *** cl-indent now allows customization of Indentation of backquoted forms.
3692 See the new user option `lisp-backquote-indentation'.
3695 *** cl-indent now handles indentation of simple and extended `loop' forms.
3697 The new user options `lisp-loop-keyword-indentation',
3698 `lisp-loop-forms-indentation', and `lisp-simple-loop-indentation' can
3699 be used to customize the indentation of keywords and forms in loop
3703 ** Variable aliases:
3705 *** New function: defvaralias ALIAS-VAR BASE-VAR [DOCSTRING]
3707 This function defines the symbol ALIAS-VAR as a variable alias for
3708 symbol BASE-VAR. This means that retrieving the value of ALIAS-VAR
3709 returns the value of BASE-VAR, and changing the value of ALIAS-VAR
3710 changes the value of BASE-VAR.
3712 DOCSTRING, if present, is the documentation for ALIAS-VAR; else it has
3713 the same documentation as BASE-VAR.
3715 *** New function: indirect-variable VARIABLE
3717 This function returns the variable at the end of the chain of aliases
3718 of VARIABLE. If VARIABLE is not a symbol, or if VARIABLE is not
3719 defined as an alias, the function returns VARIABLE.
3721 It might be noteworthy that variables aliases work for all kinds of
3722 variables, including buffer-local and frame-local variables.
3725 *** The macro `define-obsolete-variable-alias' combines `defvaralias' and
3726 `make-obsolete-variable'.
3728 ** defcustom changes:
3731 *** The package-version keyword has been added to provide
3732 `customize-changed-options' functionality to packages in the future.
3733 Developers who make use of this keyword must also update the new
3734 variable `customize-package-emacs-version-alist'.
3737 *** The new customization type `float' requires a floating point number.
3742 *** The escape sequence \s is now interpreted as a SPACE character.
3744 Exception: In a character constant, if it is followed by a `-' in a
3745 character constant (e.g. ?\s-A), it is still interpreted as the super
3746 modifier. In strings, \s is always interpreted as a space.
3749 *** A hex escape in a string constant forces the string to be multibyte.
3752 *** An octal escape in a string constant forces the string to be unibyte.
3755 *** `split-string' now includes null substrings in the returned list if
3756 the optional argument SEPARATORS is non-nil and there are matches for
3757 SEPARATORS at the beginning or end of the string. If SEPARATORS is
3758 nil, or if the new optional third argument OMIT-NULLS is non-nil, all
3759 empty matches are omitted from the returned list.
3762 *** New function `string-to-multibyte' converts a unibyte string to a
3763 multibyte string with the same individual character codes.
3766 *** New function `substring-no-properties' returns a substring without
3770 *** The new function `assoc-string' replaces `assoc-ignore-case' and
3771 `assoc-ignore-representation', which are still available, but have
3772 been declared obsolete.
3775 ** Displaying warnings to the user.
3777 See the functions `warn' and `display-warning', or the Lisp Manual.
3778 If you want to be sure the warning will not be overlooked, this
3779 facility is much better than using `message', since it displays
3780 warnings in a separate window.
3783 ** Progress reporters.
3785 These provide a simple and uniform way for commands to present
3786 progress messages for the user.
3788 See the new functions `make-progress-reporter',
3789 `progress-reporter-update', `progress-reporter-force-update',
3790 `progress-reporter-done', and `dotimes-with-progress-reporter'.
3792 ** Buffer positions:
3795 *** Function `compute-motion' now calculates the usable window
3796 width if the WIDTH argument is nil. If the TOPOS argument is nil,
3797 the usable window height and width is used.
3800 *** The `line-move', `scroll-up', and `scroll-down' functions will now
3801 modify the window vscroll to scroll through display rows that are
3802 taller that the height of the window, for example in the presence of
3803 large images. To disable this feature, bind the new variable
3804 `auto-window-vscroll' to nil.
3807 *** The argument to `forward-word', `backward-word' is optional.
3812 *** Argument to `forward-to-indentation' and `backward-to-indentation' is optional.
3817 *** New function `mouse-on-link-p' tests if a position is in a clickable link.
3819 This is the function used by the new `mouse-1-click-follows-link'
3823 *** New function `line-number-at-pos' returns the line number of a position.
3825 It an optional buffer position argument that defaults to point.
3828 *** `field-beginning' and `field-end' take new optional argument, LIMIT.
3830 This argument tells them not to search beyond LIMIT. Instead they
3831 give up and return LIMIT.
3834 *** Function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now returns the pixel coordinates
3835 and partial visibility state of the corresponding row, if the PARTIALLY
3839 *** New functions `posn-at-point' and `posn-at-x-y' return
3840 click-event-style position information for a given visible buffer
3841 position or for a given window pixel coordinate.
3843 ** Text modification:
3846 *** The new function `insert-for-yank' normally works like `insert', but
3847 removes the text properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list
3848 and handles the `yank-handler' text property.
3851 *** The new function `insert-buffer-substring-as-yank' is like
3852 `insert-for-yank' except that it gets the text from another buffer as
3853 in `insert-buffer-substring'.
3856 *** The new function `insert-buffer-substring-no-properties' is like
3857 `insert-buffer-substring', but removes all text properties from the
3861 *** The new function `filter-buffer-substring' extracts a buffer
3862 substring, passes it through a set of filter functions, and returns
3863 the filtered substring. Use it instead of `buffer-substring' or
3864 `delete-and-extract-region' when copying text into a user-accessible
3865 data structure, such as the kill-ring, X clipboard, or a register.
3867 The list of filter function is specified by the new variable
3868 `buffer-substring-filters'. For example, Longlines mode adds to
3869 `buffer-substring-filters' to remove soft newlines from the copied
3873 *** Function `translate-region' accepts also a char-table as TABLE
3877 *** The new translation table `translation-table-for-input'
3878 is used for customizing self-insertion. The character to
3879 be inserted is translated through it.
3884 The new function `text-clone-create'. Text clones are chunks of text
3885 that are kept identical by transparently propagating changes from one
3889 *** The function `insert-string' is now obsolete.
3894 *** In determining an adaptive fill prefix, Emacs now tries the function in
3895 `adaptive-fill-function' _before_ matching the buffer line against
3896 `adaptive-fill-regexp' rather than _after_ it.
3899 ** Atomic change groups.
3901 To perform some changes in the current buffer "atomically" so that
3902 they either all succeed or are all undone, use `atomic-change-group'
3903 around the code that makes changes. For instance:
3905 (atomic-change-group
3907 (delete-region x y))
3909 If an error (or other nonlocal exit) occurs inside the body of
3910 `atomic-change-group', it unmakes all the changes in that buffer that
3911 were during the execution of the body. The change group has no effect
3912 on any other buffers--any such changes remain.
3914 If you need something more sophisticated, you can directly call the
3915 lower-level functions that `atomic-change-group' uses. Here is how.
3917 To set up a change group for one buffer, call `prepare-change-group'.
3918 Specify the buffer as argument; it defaults to the current buffer.
3919 This function returns a "handle" for the change group. You must save
3920 the handle to activate the change group and then finish it.
3922 Before you change the buffer again, you must activate the change
3923 group. Pass the handle to `activate-change-group' afterward to
3926 After you make the changes, you must finish the change group. You can
3927 either accept the changes or cancel them all. Call
3928 `accept-change-group' to accept the changes in the group as final;
3929 call `cancel-change-group' to undo them all.
3931 You should use `unwind-protect' to make sure the group is always
3932 finished. The call to `activate-change-group' should be inside the
3933 `unwind-protect', in case the user types C-g just after it runs.
3934 (This is one reason why `prepare-change-group' and
3935 `activate-change-group' are separate functions.) Once you finish the
3936 group, don't use the handle again--don't try to finish the same group
3939 To make a multibuffer change group, call `prepare-change-group' once
3940 for each buffer you want to cover, then use `nconc' to combine the
3941 returned values, like this:
3943 (nconc (prepare-change-group buffer-1)
3944 (prepare-change-group buffer-2))
3946 You can then activate the multibuffer change group with a single call
3947 to `activate-change-group', and finish it with a single call to
3948 `accept-change-group' or `cancel-change-group'.
3950 Nested use of several change groups for the same buffer works as you
3951 would expect. Non-nested use of change groups for the same buffer
3952 will lead to undesirable results, so don't let it happen; the first
3953 change group you start for any given buffer should be the last one
3956 ** Buffer-related changes:
3959 *** `list-buffers-noselect' now takes an additional argument, BUFFER-LIST.
3961 If it is non-nil, it specifies which buffers to list.
3964 *** `kill-buffer-hook' is now a permanent local.
3967 *** The new function `buffer-local-value' returns the buffer-local
3968 binding of VARIABLE (a symbol) in buffer BUFFER. If VARIABLE does not
3969 have a buffer-local binding in buffer BUFFER, it returns the default
3970 value of VARIABLE instead.
3972 *** The function `frame-or-buffer-changed-p' now lets you maintain
3973 various status records in parallel.
3975 It takes a variable (a symbol) as argument. If the variable is non-nil,
3976 then its value should be a vector installed previously by
3977 `frame-or-buffer-changed-p'. If the frame names, buffer names, buffer
3978 order, or their read-only or modified flags have changed, since the
3979 time the vector's contents were recorded by a previous call to
3980 `frame-or-buffer-changed-p', then the function returns t. Otherwise
3983 On the first call to `frame-or-buffer-changed-p', the variable's
3984 value should be nil. `frame-or-buffer-changed-p' stores a suitable
3985 vector into the variable and returns t.
3987 If the variable is itself nil, then `frame-or-buffer-changed-p' uses,
3988 for compatibility, an internal variable which exists only for this
3992 *** The function `read-buffer' follows the convention for reading from
3993 the minibuffer with a default value: if DEF is non-nil, the minibuffer
3994 prompt provided in PROMPT is edited to show the default value provided
3995 in DEF before the terminal colon and space.
3997 ** Local variables lists:
4000 *** Text properties in local variables.
4002 A file local variables list cannot specify a string with text
4003 properties--any specified text properties are discarded.
4006 *** The variable `enable-local-variables' controls how local variable
4007 lists are handled. t, the default, specifies the standard querying
4008 behavior. :safe means use only safe values, and ignore the rest.
4009 nil means ignore them all. Anything else means always query.
4012 *** The variable `safe-local-eval-forms' specifies a list of forms that
4013 are ok to evaluate when they appear in an `eval' local variables
4014 specification. Normally Emacs asks for confirmation before evaluating
4015 such a form, but if the form appears in this list, no confirmation is
4019 *** If a function has a non-nil `safe-local-eval-function' property,
4020 that means it is ok to evaluate some calls to that function when it
4021 appears in an `eval' local variables specification. If the property
4022 is t, then any form calling that function with constant arguments is
4023 ok. If the property is a function or list of functions, they are called
4024 with the form as argument, and if any returns t, the form is ok to call.
4026 If the form is not "ok to call", that means Emacs asks for
4027 confirmation as before.
4029 ** Searching and matching changes:
4032 *** New function `looking-back' checks whether a regular expression matches
4033 the text before point. Specifying the LIMIT argument bounds how far
4034 back the match can start; this is a way to keep it from taking too long.
4037 *** The new variable `search-spaces-regexp' controls how to search
4038 for spaces in a regular expression. If it is non-nil, it should be a
4039 regular expression, and any series of spaces stands for that regular
4040 expression. If it is nil, spaces stand for themselves.
4042 Spaces inside of constructs such as `[..]' and inside loops such as
4043 `*', `+', and `?' are never replaced with `search-spaces-regexp'.
4046 *** New regular expression operators, `\_<' and `\_>'.
4048 These match the beginning and end of a symbol. A symbol is a
4049 non-empty sequence of either word or symbol constituent characters, as
4050 specified by the syntax table.
4053 *** rx.el has new corresponding `symbol-end' and `symbol-start' elements.
4056 *** `skip-chars-forward' and `skip-chars-backward' now handle
4057 character classes such as `[:alpha:]', along with individual
4058 characters and ranges.
4061 *** In `replace-match', the replacement text no longer inherits
4062 properties from surrounding text.
4065 *** The list returned by `(match-data t)' now has the buffer as a final
4066 element, if the last match was on a buffer. `set-match-data'
4067 accepts such a list for restoring the match state.
4070 *** Functions `match-data' and `set-match-data' now have an optional
4071 argument `reseat'. When non-nil, all markers in the match data list
4072 passed to these functions will be reseated to point to nowhere.
4075 *** The default value of `sentence-end' is now defined using the new
4076 variable `sentence-end-without-space', which contains such characters
4077 that end a sentence without following spaces.
4079 The function `sentence-end' should be used to obtain the value of the
4080 variable `sentence-end'. If the variable `sentence-end' is nil, then
4081 this function returns the regexp constructed from the variables
4082 `sentence-end-without-period', `sentence-end-double-space' and
4083 `sentence-end-without-space'.
4088 *** `buffer-undo-list' can allows programmable elements.
4090 These elements have the form (apply FUNNAME . ARGS), where FUNNAME is
4091 a symbol other than t or nil. That stands for a high-level change
4092 that should be undone by evaluating (apply FUNNAME ARGS).
4094 These entries can also have the form (apply DELTA BEG END FUNNAME . ARGS)
4095 which indicates that the change which took place was limited to the
4096 range BEG...END and increased the buffer size by DELTA.
4099 *** If the buffer's undo list for the current command gets longer than
4100 `undo-outer-limit', garbage collection empties it. This is to prevent
4101 it from using up the available memory and choking Emacs.
4104 ** New `yank-handler' text property can be used to control how
4105 previously killed text on the kill ring is reinserted.
4107 The value of the `yank-handler' property must be a list with one to four
4108 elements with the following format:
4109 (FUNCTION PARAM NOEXCLUDE UNDO).
4111 The `insert-for-yank' function looks for a yank-handler property on
4112 the first character on its string argument (typically the first
4113 element on the kill-ring). If a `yank-handler' property is found,
4114 the normal behavior of `insert-for-yank' is modified in various ways:
4116 When FUNCTION is present and non-nil, it is called instead of `insert'
4117 to insert the string. FUNCTION takes one argument--the object to insert.
4118 If PARAM is present and non-nil, it replaces STRING as the object
4119 passed to FUNCTION (or `insert'); for example, if FUNCTION is
4120 `yank-rectangle', PARAM should be a list of strings to insert as a
4122 If NOEXCLUDE is present and non-nil, the normal removal of the
4123 `yank-excluded-properties' is not performed; instead FUNCTION is
4124 responsible for removing those properties. This may be necessary
4125 if FUNCTION adjusts point before or after inserting the object.
4126 If UNDO is present and non-nil, it is a function that will be called
4127 by `yank-pop' to undo the insertion of the current object. It is
4128 called with two arguments, the start and end of the current region.
4129 FUNCTION can set `yank-undo-function' to override the UNDO value.
4131 *** The functions `kill-new', `kill-append', and `kill-region' now have an
4132 optional argument to specify the `yank-handler' text property to put on
4135 *** The function `yank-pop' will now use a non-nil value of the variable
4136 `yank-undo-function' (instead of `delete-region') to undo the previous
4137 `yank' or `yank-pop' command (or a call to `insert-for-yank'). The function
4138 `insert-for-yank' automatically sets that variable according to the UNDO
4139 element of the string argument's `yank-handler' text property if present.
4141 *** The function `insert-for-yank' now supports strings where the
4142 `yank-handler' property does not span the first character of the
4143 string. The old behavior is available if you call
4144 `insert-for-yank-1' instead.
4146 ** Syntax table changes:
4149 *** The macro `with-syntax-table' no longer copies the syntax table.
4152 *** The new function `syntax-after' returns the syntax code
4153 of the character after a specified buffer position, taking account
4154 of text properties as well as the character code.
4157 *** `syntax-class' extracts the class of a syntax code (as returned
4161 *** The new function `syntax-ppss' provides an efficient way to find the
4162 current syntactic context at point.
4164 ** File operation changes:
4167 *** New vars `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' used when
4168 searching for an executable or an Emacs Lisp file.
4171 *** The new primitive `set-file-times' sets a file's access and
4172 modification times. Magic file name handlers can handle this
4176 *** The new function `file-remote-p' tests a file name and returns
4177 non-nil if it specifies a remote file (one that Emacs accesses using
4178 its own special methods and not directly through the file system).
4179 The value in that case is an identifier for the remote file system.
4182 *** `buffer-auto-save-file-format' is the new name for what was
4183 formerly called `auto-save-file-format'. It is now a permanent local.
4186 *** Functions `file-name-sans-extension' and `file-name-extension' now
4187 ignore the leading dots in file names, so that file names such as
4188 `.emacs' are treated as extensionless.
4191 *** `copy-file' now takes an additional option arg MUSTBENEW.
4193 This argument works like the MUSTBENEW argument of write-file.
4196 *** `visited-file-modtime' and `calendar-time-from-absolute' now return
4197 a list of two integers, instead of a cons.
4200 *** `file-chase-links' now takes an optional second argument LIMIT which
4201 specifies the maximum number of links to chase through. If after that
4202 many iterations the file name obtained is still a symbolic link,
4203 `file-chase-links' returns it anyway.
4206 *** The new hook `before-save-hook' is invoked by `basic-save-buffer'
4207 before saving buffers. This allows packages to perform various final
4208 tasks. For example, it can be used by the copyright package to make
4209 sure saved files have the current year in any copyright headers.
4212 *** If `buffer-save-without-query' is non-nil in some buffer,
4213 `save-some-buffers' will always save that buffer without asking (if
4217 *** New function `locate-file' searches for a file in a list of directories.
4218 `locate-file' accepts a name of a file to search (a string), and two
4219 lists: a list of directories to search in and a list of suffixes to
4220 try; typical usage might use `exec-path' and `load-path' for the list
4221 of directories, and `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' for the list
4222 of suffixes. The function also accepts a predicate argument to
4223 further filter candidate files.
4225 One advantage of using this function is that the list of suffixes in
4226 `exec-suffixes' is OS-dependant, so this function will find
4227 executables without polluting Lisp code with OS dependencies.
4230 *** The precedence of file name handlers has been changed.
4232 Instead of choosing the first handler that matches,
4233 `find-file-name-handler' now gives precedence to a file name handler
4234 that matches nearest the end of the file name. More precisely, the
4235 handler whose (match-beginning 0) is the largest is chosen. In case
4236 of ties, the old "first matched" rule applies.
4239 *** A file name handler can declare which operations it handles.
4241 You do this by putting an `operation' property on the handler name
4242 symbol. The property value should be a list of the operations that
4243 the handler really handles. It won't be called for any other
4246 This is useful for autoloaded handlers, to prevent them from being
4247 autoloaded when not really necessary.
4250 *** The function `make-auto-save-file-name' is now handled by file
4251 name handlers. This will be exploited for remote files mainly.
4256 *** An interactive specification can now use the code letter 'U' to get
4257 the up-event that was discarded in case the last key sequence read for a
4258 previous `k' or `K' argument was a down-event; otherwise nil is used.
4261 *** The new interactive-specification `G' reads a file name
4262 much like `F', but if the input is a directory name (even defaulted),
4263 it returns just the directory name.
4266 *** Functions `y-or-n-p', `read-char', `read-key-sequence' and the like, that
4267 display a prompt but don't use the minibuffer, now display the prompt
4268 using the text properties (esp. the face) of the prompt string.
4271 *** (while-no-input BODY...) runs BODY, but only so long as no input
4272 arrives. If the user types or clicks anything, BODY stops as if a
4273 quit had occurred. `while-no-input' returns the value of BODY, if BODY
4274 finishes. It returns nil if BODY was aborted by a quit, and t if
4275 BODY was aborted by arrival of input.
4277 ** Minibuffer changes:
4280 *** The new function `minibufferp' returns non-nil if its optional
4281 buffer argument is a minibuffer. If the argument is omitted, it
4282 defaults to the current buffer.
4285 *** New function `minibuffer-selected-window' returns the window which
4286 was selected when entering the minibuffer.
4289 *** `read-from-minibuffer' now accepts an additional argument KEEP-ALL
4290 saying to put all inputs in the history list, even empty ones.
4293 *** The `read-file-name' function now takes an additional argument which
4294 specifies a predicate which the file name read must satisfy. The
4295 new variable `read-file-name-predicate' contains the predicate argument
4296 while reading the file name from the minibuffer; the predicate in this
4297 variable is used by read-file-name-internal to filter the completion list.
4300 *** The new variable `read-file-name-function' can be used by Lisp code
4301 to override the built-in `read-file-name' function.
4304 *** The new variable `read-file-name-completion-ignore-case' specifies
4305 whether completion ignores case when reading a file name with the
4306 `read-file-name' function.
4309 *** The new function `read-directory-name' is for reading a directory name.
4311 It is like `read-file-name' except that the defaulting works better
4312 for directories, and completion inside it shows only directories.
4314 ** Completion changes:
4317 *** The new function `minibuffer-completion-contents' returns the contents
4318 of the minibuffer just before point. That is what completion commands
4322 *** The functions `all-completions' and `try-completion' now accept lists
4323 of strings as well as hash-tables additionally to alists, obarrays
4324 and functions. Furthermore, the function `test-completion' is now
4325 exported to Lisp. The keys in alists and hash tables can be either
4326 strings or symbols, which are automatically converted with to strings.
4329 *** The new macro `dynamic-completion-table' supports using functions
4330 as a dynamic completion table.
4332 (dynamic-completion-table FUN)
4334 FUN is called with one argument, the string for which completion is required,
4335 and it should return an alist containing all the intended possible
4336 completions. This alist can be a full list of possible completions so that FUN
4337 can ignore the value of its argument. If completion is performed in the
4338 minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer from which the minibuffer was
4339 entered. `dynamic-completion-table' then computes the completion.
4342 *** The new macro `lazy-completion-table' initializes a variable
4343 as a lazy completion table.
4345 (lazy-completion-table VAR FUN)
4347 If the completion table VAR is used for the first time (e.g., by passing VAR
4348 as an argument to `try-completion'), the function FUN is called with no
4349 arguments. FUN must return the completion table that will be stored in VAR.
4350 If completion is requested in the minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer
4351 from which the minibuffer was entered. The return value of
4352 `lazy-completion-table' must be used to initialize the value of VAR.
4355 ** Enhancements to keymaps.
4357 *** New keymaps for typing file names
4359 Two new keymaps, `minibuffer-local-filename-completion-map' and
4360 `minibuffer-local-must-match-filename-map', apply whenever
4361 Emacs reads a file name in the minibuffer. These key maps override
4362 the usual binding of SPC to `minibuffer-complete-word' (so that file
4363 names with embedded spaces could be typed without the need to quote
4366 *** Cleaner way to enter key sequences.
4368 You can enter a constant key sequence in a more natural format, the
4369 same one used for saving keyboard macros, using the macro `kbd'. For
4372 (kbd "C-x C-f") => "\^x\^f"
4374 *** Interactive commands can be remapped through keymaps.
4376 This is an alternative to using `defadvice' or `substitute-key-definition'
4377 to modify the behavior of a key binding using the normal keymap
4378 binding and lookup functionality.
4380 When a key sequence is bound to a command, and that command is
4381 remapped to another command, that command is run instead of the
4385 Suppose that minor mode `my-mode' has defined the commands
4386 `my-kill-line' and `my-kill-word', and it wants C-k (and any other key
4387 bound to `kill-line') to run the command `my-kill-line' instead of
4388 `kill-line', and likewise it wants to run `my-kill-word' instead of
4391 Instead of rebinding C-k and the other keys in the minor mode map,
4392 command remapping allows you to directly map `kill-line' into
4393 `my-kill-line' and `kill-word' into `my-kill-word' using `define-key':
4395 (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-line] 'my-kill-line)
4396 (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-word] 'my-kill-word)
4398 When `my-mode' is enabled, its minor mode keymap is enabled too. So
4399 when the user types C-k, that runs the command `my-kill-line'.
4401 Only one level of remapping is supported. In the above example, this
4402 means that if `my-kill-line' is remapped to `other-kill', then C-k still
4403 runs `my-kill-line'.
4405 The following changes have been made to provide command remapping:
4407 - Command remappings are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
4408 `remap', i.e. `(define-key MAP [remap CMD] DEF)' remaps command CMD
4409 to definition DEF in keymap MAP. The definition is not limited to
4410 another command; it can be anything accepted for a normal binding.
4412 - The new function `command-remapping' returns the binding for a
4413 remapped command in the current keymaps, or nil if not remapped.
4415 - `key-binding' now remaps interactive commands unless the optional
4416 third argument NO-REMAP is non-nil.
4418 - `where-is-internal' now returns nil for a remapped command (e.g.
4419 `kill-line', when `my-mode' is enabled), and the actual key binding for
4420 the command it is remapped to (e.g. C-k for my-kill-line).
4421 It also has a new optional fifth argument, NO-REMAP, which inhibits
4422 remapping if non-nil (e.g. it returns "C-k" for `kill-line', and
4423 "<kill-line>" for `my-kill-line').
4425 - The new variable `this-original-command' contains the original
4426 command before remapping. It is equal to `this-command' when the
4427 command was not remapped.
4429 *** If text has a `keymap' property, that keymap takes precedence
4430 over minor mode keymaps.
4432 *** The `keymap' property now also works at the ends of overlays and
4433 text properties, according to their stickiness. This also means that it
4434 works with empty overlays. The same hold for the `local-map' property.
4436 *** Dense keymaps now handle inheritance correctly.
4438 Previously a dense keymap would hide all of the simple-char key
4439 bindings of the parent keymap.
4441 *** `define-key-after' now accepts keys longer than 1.
4443 *** New function `current-active-maps' returns a list of currently
4446 *** New function `describe-buffer-bindings' inserts the list of all
4447 defined keys and their definitions.
4449 *** New function `keymap-prompt' returns the prompt string of a keymap.
4451 *** (map-keymap FUNCTION KEYMAP) applies the function to each binding
4454 *** New variable `emulation-mode-map-alists'.
4456 Lisp packages using many minor mode keymaps can now maintain their own
4457 keymap alist separate from `minor-mode-map-alist' by adding their
4458 keymap alist to this list.
4463 *** The new function `copy-abbrev-table' copies an abbrev table.
4465 It returns a new abbrev table that is a copy of a given abbrev table.
4468 *** `define-abbrev' now accepts an optional argument SYSTEM-FLAG.
4470 If non-nil, this marks the abbrev as a "system" abbrev, which means
4471 that it won't be stored in the user's abbrevs file if he saves the
4472 abbrevs. Major modes that predefine some abbrevs should always
4476 ** Enhancements to process support
4478 *** Function `list-processes' now has an optional argument; if non-nil,
4479 it lists only the processes whose query-on-exit flag is set.
4481 *** New fns `set-process-query-on-exit-flag' and `process-query-on-exit-flag'.
4483 These replace the old function `process-kill-without-query'. That
4484 function is still supported, but new code should use the new
4487 *** Function `signal-process' now accepts a process object or process
4488 name in addition to a process id to identify the signaled process.
4490 *** Processes now have an associated property list where programs can
4491 maintain process state and other per-process related information.
4493 Use the new functions `process-get' and `process-put' to access, add,
4494 and modify elements on this property list. Use the new functions
4495 `process-plist' and `set-process-plist' to access and replace the
4496 entire property list of a process.
4498 *** Function `accept-process-output' has a new optional fourth arg
4499 JUST-THIS-ONE. If non-nil, only output from the specified process
4500 is handled, suspending output from other processes. If value is an
4501 integer, also inhibit running timers. This feature is generally not
4502 recommended, but may be necessary for specific applications, such as
4505 *** Adaptive read buffering of subprocess output.
4507 On some systems, when emacs reads the output from a subprocess, the
4508 output data is read in very small blocks, potentially resulting in
4509 very poor performance. This behavior can be remedied to some extent
4510 by setting the new variable `process-adaptive-read-buffering' to a
4511 non-nil value (the default), as it will automatically delay reading
4512 from such processes, allowing them to produce more output before
4513 emacs tries to read it.
4515 *** The new function `call-process-shell-command'.
4517 This executes a shell command synchronously in a separate process.
4519 *** The new function `process-file' is similar to `call-process', but
4520 obeys file handlers. The file handler is chosen based on
4521 `default-directory'.
4523 *** A process filter function gets the output as multibyte string
4524 if the process specifies t for its filter's multibyteness.
4526 That multibyteness is decided by the value of
4527 `default-enable-multibyte-characters' when the process is created, and
4528 you can change it later with `set-process-filter-multibyte'.
4530 *** The new function `set-process-filter-multibyte' sets the
4531 multibyteness of the strings passed to the process's filter.
4533 *** The new function `process-filter-multibyte-p' returns the
4534 multibyteness of the strings passed to the process's filter.
4536 *** If a process's coding system is `raw-text' or `no-conversion' and its
4537 buffer is multibyte, the output of the process is at first converted
4538 to multibyte by `string-to-multibyte' then inserted in the buffer.
4539 Previously, it was converted to multibyte by `string-as-multibyte',
4540 which was not compatible with the behavior of file reading.
4543 ** Enhanced networking support.
4545 *** The new `make-network-process' function makes network connections.
4546 It allows opening of stream and datagram connections to a server, as well as
4547 create a stream or datagram server inside emacs.
4549 - A server is started using :server t arg.
4550 - Datagram connection is selected using :type 'datagram arg.
4551 - A server can open on a random port using :service t arg.
4552 - Local sockets are supported using :family 'local arg.
4553 - IPv6 is supported (when available). You may explicitly select IPv6
4554 using :family 'ipv6 arg.
4555 - Non-blocking connect is supported using :nowait t arg.
4556 - The process' property list can be initialized using :plist PLIST arg;
4557 a copy of the server process' property list is automatically inherited
4558 by new client processes created to handle incoming connections.
4560 To test for the availability of a given feature, use featurep like this:
4561 (featurep 'make-network-process '(:type datagram))
4562 (featurep 'make-network-process '(:family ipv6))
4564 *** The old `open-network-stream' now uses `make-network-process'.
4566 *** New functions `process-datagram-address', `set-process-datagram-address'.
4568 These functions are used with datagram-based network processes to get
4569 and set the current address of the remote partner.
4571 *** New function `format-network-address'.
4573 This function reformats the Lisp representation of a network address
4574 to a printable string. For example, an IP address A.B.C.D and port
4575 number P is represented as a five element vector [A B C D P], and the
4576 printable string returned for this vector is "A.B.C.D:P". See the doc
4577 string for other formatting options.
4579 *** `process-contact' has an optional KEY argument.
4581 Depending on this argument, you can get the complete list of network
4582 process properties or a specific property. Using :local or :remote as
4583 the KEY, you get the address of the local or remote end-point.
4585 An Inet address is represented as a 5 element vector, where the first
4586 4 elements contain the IP address and the fifth is the port number.
4588 *** New functions `stop-process' and `continue-process'.
4590 These functions stop and restart communication through a network
4591 connection. For a server process, no connections are accepted in the
4592 stopped state. For a client process, no input is received in the
4595 *** New function `network-interface-list'.
4597 This function returns a list of network interface names and their
4598 current network addresses.
4600 *** New function `network-interface-info'.
4602 This function returns the network address, hardware address, current
4603 status, and other information about a specific network interface.
4605 *** Deleting a network process with `delete-process' calls the sentinel.
4607 The status message passed to the sentinel for a deleted network
4608 process is "deleted". The message passed to the sentinel when the
4609 connection is closed by the remote peer has been changed to
4610 "connection broken by remote peer".
4612 ** Using window objects:
4615 *** New function `window-body-height'.
4617 This is like `window-height' but does not count the mode line or the
4621 *** New function `window-body-height'.
4623 This is like `window-height' but does not count the mode line
4627 *** You can now make a window as short as one line.
4629 A window that is just one line tall does not display either a mode
4630 line or a header line, even if the variables `mode-line-format' and
4631 `header-line-format' call for them. A window that is two lines tall
4632 cannot display both a mode line and a header line at once; if the
4633 variables call for both, only the mode line actually appears.
4636 *** The new function `window-inside-edges' returns the edges of the
4637 actual text portion of the window, not including the scroll bar or
4638 divider line, the fringes, the display margins, the header line and
4642 *** The new functions `window-pixel-edges' and `window-inside-pixel-edges'
4643 return window edges in units of pixels, rather than columns and lines.
4646 *** The new macro `with-selected-window' temporarily switches the
4647 selected window without impacting the order of `buffer-list'.
4648 It saves and restores the current buffer, too.
4651 *** `select-window' takes an optional second argument NORECORD.
4653 This is like `switch-to-buffer'.
4656 *** `save-selected-window' now saves and restores the selected window
4657 of every frame. This way, it restores everything that can be changed
4658 by calling `select-window'. It also saves and restores the current
4662 *** `set-window-buffer' has an optional argument KEEP-MARGINS.
4664 If non-nil, that says to preserve the window's current margin, fringe,
4665 and scroll-bar settings.
4668 *** The new function `window-tree' returns a frame's window tree.
4671 *** The functions `get-lru-window' and `get-largest-window' take an optional
4672 argument `dedicated'. If non-nil, those functions do not ignore
4676 *** The new function `adjust-window-trailing-edge' moves the right
4677 or bottom edge of a window. It does not move other window edges.
4680 ** Customizable fringe bitmaps
4682 *** New buffer-local variables `fringe-indicator-alist' and
4683 `fringe-cursor-alist' maps between logical (internal) fringe indicator
4684 and cursor symbols and the actual fringe bitmaps to be displayed.
4685 This decouples the logical meaning of the fringe indicators from the
4686 physical appearance, as well as allowing different fringe bitmaps to
4687 be used in different windows showing different buffers.
4689 *** New function `define-fringe-bitmap' can now be used to create new
4690 fringe bitmaps, as well as change the built-in fringe bitmaps.
4692 To change a built-in bitmap, do (require 'fringe) and use the symbol
4693 identifying the bitmap such as `left-truncation' or `continued-line'.
4695 *** New function `destroy-fringe-bitmap' deletes a fringe bitmap
4696 or restores a built-in one to its default value.
4698 *** New function `set-fringe-bitmap-face' specifies the face to be
4699 used for a specific fringe bitmap. The face is automatically merged
4700 with the `fringe' face, so normally, the face should only specify the
4701 foreground color of the bitmap.
4703 *** There are new display properties, `left-fringe' and `right-fringe',
4704 that can be used to show a specific bitmap in the left or right fringe
4705 bitmap of the display line.
4707 Format is `display (left-fringe BITMAP [FACE])', where BITMAP is a
4708 symbol identifying a fringe bitmap, either built-in or defined with
4709 `define-fringe-bitmap', and FACE is an optional face name to be used
4710 for displaying the bitmap instead of the default `fringe' face.
4711 When specified, FACE is automatically merged with the `fringe' face.
4713 *** New function `fringe-bitmaps-at-pos' returns the current fringe
4714 bitmaps in the display line at a given buffer position.
4716 ** Other window fringe features:
4719 *** Controlling the default left and right fringe widths.
4721 The default left and right fringe widths for all windows of a frame
4722 can now be controlled by setting the `left-fringe' and `right-fringe'
4723 frame parameters to an integer value specifying the width in pixels.
4724 Setting the width to 0 effectively removes the corresponding fringe.
4726 The actual default fringe widths for the frame may deviate from the
4727 specified widths, since the combined fringe widths must match an
4728 integral number of columns. The extra width is distributed evenly
4729 between the left and right fringe. To force a specific fringe width,
4730 specify the width as a negative integer (if both widths are negative,
4731 only the left fringe gets the specified width).
4733 Setting the width to nil (the default), restores the default fringe
4734 width which is the minimum number of pixels necessary to display any
4735 of the currently defined fringe bitmaps. The width of the built-in
4736 fringe bitmaps is 8 pixels.
4739 *** Per-window fringe and scrollbar settings
4741 **** Windows can now have their own individual fringe widths and
4744 To control the fringe widths of a window, either set the buffer-local
4745 variables `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', or call
4746 `set-window-fringes'.
4748 To control the fringe position in a window, that is, whether fringes
4749 are positioned between the display margins and the window's text area,
4750 or at the edges of the window, either set the buffer-local variable
4751 `fringes-outside-margins' or call `set-window-fringes'.
4753 The function `window-fringes' can be used to obtain the current
4754 settings. To make `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', and
4755 `fringes-outside-margins' take effect, you must set them before
4756 displaying the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force
4757 an update of the display margins.
4759 **** Windows can now have their own individual scroll-bar settings
4760 controlling the width and position of scroll-bars.
4762 To control the scroll-bar of a window, either set the buffer-local
4763 variables `scroll-bar-mode' and `scroll-bar-width', or call
4764 `set-window-scroll-bars'. The function `window-scroll-bars' can be
4765 used to obtain the current settings. To make `scroll-bar-mode' and
4766 `scroll-bar-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
4767 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
4768 of the display margins.
4770 ** Redisplay features:
4773 *** `sit-for' can now be called with args (SECONDS &optional NODISP).
4776 *** New function `force-window-update' can initiate a full redisplay of
4777 one or all windows. Normally, this is not needed as changes in window
4778 contents are detected automatically. However, certain implicit
4779 changes to mode lines, header lines, or display properties may require
4780 forcing an explicit window update.
4783 *** (char-displayable-p CHAR) returns non-nil if Emacs ought to be able
4784 to display CHAR. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has
4785 a font to display the character set that CHAR belongs to.
4787 Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset
4788 does that, this value cannot be accurate.
4791 *** You can define multiple overlay arrows via the new
4792 variable `overlay-arrow-variable-list'.
4794 It contains a list of variables which contain overlay arrow position
4795 markers, including the original `overlay-arrow-position' variable.
4797 Each variable on this list can have individual `overlay-arrow-string'
4798 and `overlay-arrow-bitmap' properties that specify an overlay arrow
4799 string (for non-window terminals) or fringe bitmap (for window
4800 systems) to display at the corresponding overlay arrow position.
4801 If either property is not set, the default `overlay-arrow-string' or
4802 'overlay-arrow-fringe-bitmap' will be used.
4805 *** New `line-height' and `line-spacing' properties for newline characters
4807 A newline can now have `line-height' and `line-spacing' text or overlay
4808 properties that control the height of the corresponding display row.
4810 If the `line-height' property value is t, the newline does not
4811 contribute to the height of the display row; instead the height of the
4812 newline glyph is reduced. Also, a `line-spacing' property on this
4813 newline is ignored. This can be used to tile small images or image
4814 slices without adding blank areas between the images.
4816 If the `line-height' property value is a positive integer, the value
4817 specifies the minimum line height in pixels. If necessary, the line
4818 height it increased by increasing the line's ascent.
4820 If the `line-height' property value is a float, the minimum line
4821 height is calculated by multiplying the default frame line height by
4824 If the `line-height' property value is a cons (FACE . RATIO), the
4825 minimum line height is calculated as RATIO * height of named FACE.
4826 RATIO is int or float. If FACE is t, it specifies the current face.
4828 If the `line-height' property value is a cons (nil . RATIO), the line
4829 height is calculated as RATIO * actual height of the line's contents.
4831 If the `line-height' value is a cons (HEIGHT . TOTAL), HEIGHT specifies
4832 the line height as described above, while TOTAL is any of the forms
4833 described above and specifies the total height of the line, causing a
4834 varying number of pixels to be inserted after the line to make it line
4835 exactly that many pixels high.
4837 If the `line-spacing' property value is an positive integer, the value
4838 is used as additional pixels to insert after the display line; this
4839 overrides the default frame `line-spacing' and any buffer local value of
4840 the `line-spacing' variable.
4842 If the `line-spacing' property is a float or cons, the line spacing
4843 is calculated as specified above for the `line-height' property.
4846 *** The buffer local `line-spacing' variable can now have a float value,
4847 which is used as a height relative to the default frame line height.
4850 *** Enhancements to stretch display properties
4852 The display property stretch specification form `(space PROPS)', where
4853 PROPS is a property list, now allows pixel based width and height
4854 specifications, as well as enhanced horizontal text alignment.
4856 The value of these properties can now be a (primitive) expression
4857 which is evaluated during redisplay. The following expressions
4860 EXPR ::= NUM | (NUM) | UNIT | ELEM | POS | IMAGE | FORM
4861 NUM ::= INTEGER | FLOAT | SYMBOL
4862 UNIT ::= in | mm | cm | width | height
4863 ELEM ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin
4865 POS ::= left | center | right
4866 FORM ::= (NUM . EXPR) | (OP EXPR ...)
4869 The form `NUM' specifies a fractional width or height of the default
4870 frame font size. The form `(NUM)' specifies an absolute number of
4871 pixels. If a symbol is specified, its buffer-local variable binding
4872 is used. The `in', `mm', and `cm' units specifies the number of
4873 pixels per inch, milli-meter, and centi-meter, resp. The `width' and
4874 `height' units correspond to the width and height of the current face
4875 font. An image specification corresponds to the width or height of
4878 The `left-fringe', `right-fringe', `left-margin', `right-margin',
4879 `scroll-bar', and `text' elements specify to the width of the
4880 corresponding area of the window.
4882 The `left', `center', and `right' positions can be used with :align-to
4883 to specify a position relative to the left edge, center, or right edge
4884 of the text area. One of the above window elements (except `text')
4885 can also be used with :align-to to specify that the position is
4886 relative to the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for
4887 a relative position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of
4888 these symbols), further occurrences of these symbols are interpreted as
4889 the width of the area.
4891 For example, to align to the center of the left-margin, use
4892 :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin))
4894 If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative
4895 to the left edge of the text area. For example, :align-to 0 in a
4896 header line aligns with the first text column in the text area.
4898 The value of the form `(NUM . EXPR)' is the value of NUM multiplied by
4899 the value of the expression EXPR. For example, (2 . in) specifies a
4900 width of 2 inches, while (0.5 . IMAGE) specifies half the width (or
4901 height) of the specified image.
4903 The form `(+ EXPR ...)' adds up the value of the expressions.
4904 The form `(- EXPR ...)' negates or subtracts the value of the expressions.
4907 *** Normally, the cursor is displayed at the end of any overlay and
4908 text property string that may be present at the current window
4909 position. The cursor can now be placed on any character of such
4910 strings by giving that character a non-nil `cursor' text property.
4913 *** The display space :width and :align-to text properties are now
4914 supported on text terminals.
4917 *** Support for displaying image slices
4919 **** New display property (slice X Y WIDTH HEIGHT) can be used with
4920 an image property to display only a specific slice of the image.
4922 **** Function `insert-image' has new optional fourth arg to
4923 specify image slice (X Y WIDTH HEIGHT).
4925 **** New function `insert-sliced-image' inserts a given image as a
4926 specified number of evenly sized slices (rows x columns).
4929 *** Images can now have an associated image map via the :map property.
4931 An image map is an alist where each element has the format (AREA ID PLIST).
4932 An AREA is specified as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon:
4933 A rectangle is a cons (rect . ((X0 . Y0) . (X1 . Y1))) specifying the
4934 pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right corners.
4935 A circle is a cons (circle . ((X0 . Y0) . R)) specifying the center
4936 and the radius of the circle; R can be a float or integer.
4937 A polygon is a cons (poly . [X0 Y0 X1 Y1 ...]) where each pair in the
4938 vector describes one corner in the polygon.
4940 When the mouse pointer is above a hot-spot area of an image, the
4941 PLIST of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a `help-echo'
4942 property it defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains
4943 a `pointer' property, it defines the shape of the mouse cursor when
4944 it is over the hot-spot. See the variable `void-area-text-pointer'
4945 for possible pointer shapes.
4947 When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot,
4948 an event is composed by combining the ID of the hot-spot with the
4949 mouse event, e.g. [area4 mouse-1] if the hot-spot's ID is `area4'.
4952 *** The function `find-image' now searches in etc/images/ and etc/.
4953 The new variable `image-load-path' is a list of locations in which to
4954 search for image files. The default is to search in etc/images, then
4955 in etc/, and finally in the directories specified by `load-path'.
4956 Subdirectories of etc/ and etc/images are not recursively searched; if
4957 you put an image file in a subdirectory, you have to specify it
4958 explicitly; for example, if an image is put in etc/images/foo/bar.xpm:
4960 (defimage foo-image '((:type xpm :file "foo/bar.xpm")))
4962 Note that all images formerly located in the lisp directory have been
4963 moved to etc/images.
4966 *** New function `image-load-path-for-library' returns a suitable
4967 search path for images relative to library. This function is useful in
4968 external packages to save users from having to update
4972 *** The new variable `max-image-size' defines the maximum size of
4973 images that Emacs will load and display.
4975 ** Mouse pointer features:
4979 *** The mouse pointer shape in void text areas (i.e. after the end of a
4980 line or below the last line in the buffer) of the text window is now
4981 controlled by the new variable `void-text-area-pointer'. The default
4982 is to use the `arrow' (non-text) pointer. Other choices are `text'
4983 (or nil), `hand', `vdrag', `hdrag', `modeline', and `hourglass'.
4986 *** The mouse pointer shape over an image can now be controlled by the
4987 :pointer image property.
4990 *** The mouse pointer shape over ordinary text or images can now be
4991 controlled/overridden via the `pointer' text property.
4993 ** Mouse event enhancements:
4996 *** Mouse events for clicks on window fringes now specify `left-fringe'
4997 or `right-fringe' as the area.
5000 *** All mouse events now include a buffer position regardless of where
5001 you clicked. For mouse clicks in window margins and fringes, this is
5002 a sensible buffer position corresponding to the surrounding text.
5005 *** `posn-point' now returns buffer position for non-text area events.
5008 *** Function `mouse-set-point' now works for events outside text area.
5011 *** New function `posn-area' returns window area clicked on (nil means
5015 *** Mouse events include actual glyph column and row for all event types
5019 *** New function `posn-actual-col-row' returns the actual glyph coordinates
5020 of the mouse event position.
5023 *** Mouse events can now indicate an image object clicked on.
5026 *** Mouse events include relative X and Y pixel coordinates relative to
5027 the top left corner of the object (image or character) clicked on.
5030 *** Mouse events include the pixel width and height of the object
5031 (image or character) clicked on.
5034 *** New functions 'posn-object', 'posn-object-x-y', 'posn-object-width-height'.
5036 These return the image or string object of a mouse click, the X and Y
5037 pixel coordinates relative to the top left corner of that object, and
5038 the total width and height of that object.
5040 ** Text property and overlay changes:
5043 *** Arguments for `remove-overlays' are now optional, so that you can
5044 remove all overlays in the buffer with just (remove-overlays).
5047 *** New variable `char-property-alias-alist'.
5049 This variable allows you to create alternative names for text
5050 properties. It works at the same level as `default-text-properties',
5051 although it applies to overlays as well. This variable was introduced
5052 to implement the `font-lock-face' property.
5055 *** New function `get-char-property-and-overlay' accepts the same
5056 arguments as `get-char-property' and returns a cons whose car is the
5057 return value of `get-char-property' called with those arguments and
5058 whose cdr is the overlay in which the property was found, or nil if
5059 it was found as a text property or not found at all.
5062 *** The new function `remove-list-of-text-properties'.
5064 It is like `remove-text-properties' except that it takes a list of
5065 property names as argument rather than a property list.
5070 *** The new face attribute condition `min-colors' can be used to tailor
5071 the face color to the number of colors supported by a display, and
5072 define the foreground and background colors accordingly so that they
5073 look best on a terminal that supports at least this many colors. This
5074 is now the preferred method for defining default faces in a way that
5075 makes a good use of the capabilities of the display.
5078 *** New function `display-supports-face-attributes-p' can be used to test
5079 whether a given set of face attributes is actually displayable.
5081 A new predicate `supports' has also been added to the `defface' face
5082 specification language, which can be used to do this test for faces
5083 defined with `defface'.
5086 *** The special treatment of faces whose names are of the form `fg:COLOR'
5087 or `bg:COLOR' has been removed. Lisp programs should use the
5088 `defface' facility for defining faces with specific colors, or use
5089 the feature of specifying the face attributes :foreground and :background
5090 directly in the `face' property instead of using a named face.
5093 *** The first face specification element in a defface can specify
5094 `default' instead of frame classification. Then its attributes act as
5095 defaults that apply to all the subsequent cases (and can be overridden
5099 *** The variable `face-font-rescale-alist' specifies how much larger
5100 (or smaller) font we should use. For instance, if the value is
5101 '((SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN . 1.3)) and a face requests a font of 10
5102 point, we actually use a font of 13 point if the font matches
5103 SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN.
5106 *** The function `face-differs-from-default-p' now truly checks
5107 whether the given face displays differently from the default face or
5108 not (previously it did only a very cursory check).
5111 *** `face-attribute', `face-foreground', `face-background', `face-stipple'.
5113 These now accept a new optional argument, INHERIT, which controls how
5114 face inheritance is used when determining the value of a face
5118 *** New functions `face-attribute-relative-p' and `merge-face-attribute'
5119 help with handling relative face attributes.
5122 *** The priority of faces in an :inherit attribute face list is reversed.
5124 If a face contains an :inherit attribute with a list of faces, earlier
5125 faces in the list override later faces in the list; in previous
5126 releases of Emacs, the order was the opposite. This change was made
5127 so that :inherit face lists operate identically to face lists in text
5131 *** On terminals, faces with the :inverse-video attribute are displayed
5132 with swapped foreground and background colors even when one of them is
5133 not specified. In previous releases of Emacs, if either foreground
5134 or background color was unspecified, colors were not swapped. This
5135 was inconsistent with the face behavior under X.
5138 *** `set-fontset-font', `fontset-info', `fontset-font' now operate on
5139 the default fontset if the argument NAME is nil..
5141 ** Font-Lock changes:
5144 *** New special text property `font-lock-face'.
5146 This property acts like the `face' property, but it is controlled by
5147 M-x font-lock-mode. It is not, strictly speaking, a builtin text
5148 property. Instead, it is implemented inside font-core.el, using the
5149 new variable `char-property-alias-alist'.
5152 *** font-lock can manage arbitrary text-properties beside `face'.
5154 **** the FACENAME returned in `font-lock-keywords' can be a list of the
5155 form (face FACE PROP1 VAL1 PROP2 VAL2 ...) so you can set other
5156 properties than `face'.
5158 **** `font-lock-extra-managed-props' can be set to make sure those
5159 extra properties are automatically cleaned up by font-lock.
5162 *** jit-lock obeys a new text-property `jit-lock-defer-multiline'.
5164 If a piece of text with that property gets contextually refontified
5165 (see `jit-lock-defer-contextually'), then all of that text will
5166 be refontified. This is useful when the syntax of a textual element
5167 depends on text several lines further down (and when `font-lock-multiline'
5168 is not appropriate to solve that problem). For example in Perl:
5176 Adding/removing the last `e' changes the `bar' from being a piece of
5177 text to being a piece of code, so you'd put a `jit-lock-defer-multiline'
5178 property over the second half of the command to force (deferred)
5179 refontification of `bar' whenever the `e' is added/removed.
5181 ** Major mode mechanism changes:
5184 *** `set-auto-mode' now gives the interpreter magic line (if present)
5185 precedence over the file name. Likewise an `<?xml' or `<!DOCTYPE'
5186 declaration will give the buffer XML or SGML mode, based on the new
5187 variable `magic-mode-alist'.
5190 *** Use the new function `run-mode-hooks' to run the major mode's mode hook.
5193 *** All major mode functions should now run the new normal hook
5194 `after-change-major-mode-hook', at their very end, after the mode
5195 hooks. `run-mode-hooks' does this automatically.
5198 *** If a major mode function has a non-nil `no-clone-indirect'
5199 property, `clone-indirect-buffer' signals an error if you use
5203 *** Major modes can define `eldoc-documentation-function'
5204 locally to provide Eldoc functionality by some method appropriate to
5208 *** `define-derived-mode' by default creates a new empty abbrev table.
5209 It does not copy abbrevs from the parent mode's abbrev table.
5212 *** The new function `run-mode-hooks' and the new macro `delay-mode-hooks'
5213 are used by `define-derived-mode' to make sure the mode hook for the
5214 parent mode is run at the end of the child mode.
5216 ** Minor mode changes:
5219 *** `define-minor-mode' now accepts arbitrary additional keyword arguments
5220 and simply passes them to `defcustom', if applicable.
5223 *** `minor-mode-list' now holds a list of minor mode commands.
5226 *** `define-global-minor-mode'.
5228 This is a new name for what was formerly called
5229 `easy-mmode-define-global-mode'. The old name remains as an alias.
5231 ** Command loop changes:
5234 *** The new function `called-interactively-p' does what many people
5235 have mistakenly believed `interactive-p' to do: it returns t if the
5236 calling function was called through `call-interactively'.
5238 Only use this when you cannot solve the problem by adding a new
5239 INTERACTIVE argument to the command.
5242 *** The function `commandp' takes an additional optional argument.
5244 If it is non-nil, then `commandp' checks for a function that could be
5245 called with `call-interactively', and does not return t for keyboard
5249 *** When a command returns, the command loop moves point out from
5250 within invisible text, in the same way it moves out from within text
5251 covered by an image or composition property.
5253 This makes it generally unnecessary to mark invisible text as intangible.
5254 This is particularly good because the intangible property often has
5255 unexpected side-effects since the property applies to everything
5256 (including `goto-char', ...) whereas this new code is only run after
5257 `post-command-hook' and thus does not care about intermediate states.
5260 *** If a command sets `transient-mark-mode' to `only', that
5261 enables Transient Mark mode for the following command only.
5262 During that following command, the value of `transient-mark-mode'
5263 is `identity'. If it is still `identity' at the end of the command,
5264 the next return to the command loop changes to nil.
5267 *** Both the variable and the function `disabled-command-hook' have
5268 been renamed to `disabled-command-function'. The variable
5269 `disabled-command-hook' has been kept as an obsolete alias.
5272 *** `emacsserver' now runs `pre-command-hook' and `post-command-hook'
5273 when it receives a request from emacsclient.
5275 ** Lisp file loading changes:
5278 *** `load-history' can now have elements of the form (t . FUNNAME),
5279 which means FUNNAME was previously defined as an autoload (before the
5280 current file redefined it).
5283 *** `load-history' now records (defun . FUNNAME) when a function is
5284 defined. For a variable, it records just the variable name.
5287 *** The function `symbol-file' can now search specifically for function,
5288 variable or face definitions.
5291 *** `provide' and `featurep' now accept an optional second argument
5292 to test/provide subfeatures. Also `provide' now checks `after-load-alist'
5293 and runs any code associated with the provided feature.
5296 *** The variable `recursive-load-depth-limit' has been deleted.
5297 Emacs now signals an error if the same file is loaded with more
5298 than 3 levels of nesting.
5301 ** Byte compiler changes:
5303 *** The byte compiler now displays the actual line and character
5304 position of errors, where possible. Additionally, the form of its
5305 warning and error messages have been brought into line with GNU standards
5306 for these. As a result, you can use next-error and friends on the
5307 compilation output buffer.
5309 *** The new macro `with-no-warnings' suppresses all compiler warnings
5310 inside its body. In terms of execution, it is equivalent to `progn'.
5312 *** You can avoid warnings for possibly-undefined symbols with a
5313 simple convention that the compiler understands. (This is mostly
5314 useful in code meant to be portable to different Emacs versions.)
5315 Write forms like the following, or code that macroexpands into such
5318 (if (fboundp 'foo) <then> <else>)
5319 (if (boundp 'foo) <then> <else)
5321 In the first case, using `foo' as a function inside the <then> form
5322 won't produce a warning if it's not defined as a function, and in the
5323 second case, using `foo' as a variable won't produce a warning if it's
5324 unbound. The test must be in exactly one of the above forms (after
5325 macro expansion), but such tests can be nested. Note that `when' and
5326 `unless' expand to `if', but `cond' doesn't.
5328 *** `(featurep 'xemacs)' is treated by the compiler as nil. This
5329 helps to avoid noisy compiler warnings in code meant to run under both
5330 Emacs and XEmacs and can sometimes make the result significantly more
5331 efficient. Since byte code from recent versions of XEmacs won't
5332 generally run in Emacs and vice versa, this optimization doesn't lose
5335 *** The local variable `no-byte-compile' in Lisp files is now obeyed.
5338 *** When a Lisp file uses CL functions at run-time, compiling the file
5339 now issues warnings about these calls, unless the file performs
5340 (require 'cl) when loaded.
5342 ** Frame operations:
5345 *** New functions `frame-current-scroll-bars' and `window-current-scroll-bars'.
5347 These functions return the current locations of the vertical and
5348 horizontal scroll bars in a frame or window.
5351 *** The new function `modify-all-frames-parameters' modifies parameters
5352 for all (existing and future) frames.
5355 *** The new frame parameter `tty-color-mode' specifies the mode to use
5356 for color support on character terminal frames. Its value can be a
5357 number of colors to support, or a symbol. See the Emacs Lisp
5358 Reference manual for more detailed documentation.
5361 *** When using non-toolkit scroll bars with the default width,
5362 the `scroll-bar-width' frame parameter value is nil.
5367 *** Already true in Emacs 21.1, but not emphasized clearly enough:
5369 Multibyte buffers can now faithfully record all 256 character codes
5370 from 0 to 255. As a result, most of the past reasons to use unibyte
5371 buffers no longer exist. We only know of three reasons to use them
5374 1. If you prefer to use unibyte text all of the time.
5376 2. For reading files into temporary buffers, when you want to avoid
5377 the time it takes to convert the format.
5379 3. For binary files where format conversion would be pointless and
5383 *** `set-buffer-file-coding-system' now takes an additional argument,
5384 NOMODIFY. If it is non-nil, it means don't mark the buffer modified.
5387 *** The new variable `auto-coding-functions' lets you specify functions
5388 to examine a file being visited and deduce the proper coding system
5389 for it. (If the coding system is detected incorrectly for a specific
5390 file, you can put a `coding:' tags to override it.)
5393 *** The new function `merge-coding-systems' fills in unspecified aspects
5394 of one coding system from another coding system.
5397 *** New coding system property `mime-text-unsuitable' indicates that
5398 the coding system's `mime-charset' is not suitable for MIME text
5402 *** New function `decode-coding-inserted-region' decodes a region as if
5403 it is read from a file without decoding.
5406 *** New CCL functions `lookup-character' and `lookup-integer' access
5407 hash tables defined by the Lisp function `define-translation-hash-table'.
5410 *** New function `quail-find-key' returns a list of keys to type in the
5411 current input method to input a character.
5413 ** Mode line changes:
5416 *** New function `format-mode-line'.
5418 This returns the mode line or header line of the selected (or a
5419 specified) window as a string with or without text properties.
5422 *** The new mode-line construct `(:propertize ELT PROPS...)' can be
5423 used to add text properties to mode-line elements.
5426 *** The new `%i' and `%I' constructs for `mode-line-format' can be used
5427 to display the size of the accessible part of the buffer on the mode
5431 *** Mouse-face on mode-line (and header-line) is now supported.
5433 ** Menu manipulation changes:
5436 *** To manipulate the File menu using easy-menu, you must specify the
5437 proper name "file". In previous Emacs versions, you had to specify
5438 "files", even though the menu item itself was changed to say "File"
5439 several versions ago.
5442 *** The dummy function keys made by easy-menu are now always lower case.
5443 If you specify the menu item name "Ada", for instance, it uses `ada'
5444 as the "key" bound by that key binding.
5446 This is relevant only if Lisp code looks for the bindings that were
5447 made with easy-menu.
5450 *** `easy-menu-define' now allows you to use nil for the symbol name
5451 if you don't need to give the menu a name. If you install the menu
5452 into other keymaps right away (MAPS is non-nil), it usually doesn't
5453 need to have a name.
5455 ** Operating system access:
5458 *** The new primitive `get-internal-run-time' returns the processor
5459 run time used by Emacs since start-up.
5462 *** Functions `user-uid' and `user-real-uid' now return floats if the
5463 user UID doesn't fit in a Lisp integer. Function `user-full-name'
5464 accepts a float as UID parameter.
5467 *** New function `locale-info' accesses locale information.
5470 *** On MS Windows, locale-coding-system is used to interact with the OS.
5471 The Windows specific variable w32-system-coding-system, which was
5472 formerly used for that purpose is now an alias for locale-coding-system.
5475 *** New function `redirect-debugging-output' can be used to redirect
5476 debugging output on the stderr file handle to a file.
5481 *** A number of hooks have been renamed to better follow the conventions:
5483 `find-file-hooks' to `find-file-hook',
5484 `find-file-not-found-hooks' to `find-file-not-found-functions',
5485 `write-file-hooks' to `write-file-functions',
5486 `write-contents-hooks' to `write-contents-functions',
5487 `x-lost-selection-hooks' to `x-lost-selection-functions',
5488 `x-sent-selection-hooks' to `x-sent-selection-functions',
5489 `delete-frame-hook' to `delete-frame-functions'.
5491 In each case the old name remains as an alias for the moment.
5494 *** Variable `local-write-file-hooks' is marked obsolete.
5496 Use the LOCAL arg of `add-hook'.
5499 *** New function `x-send-client-message' sends a client message when
5505 *** New variable `gc-cons-percentage' automatically grows the GC cons threshold
5506 as the heap size increases.
5509 *** New variables `gc-elapsed' and `gcs-done' provide extra information
5510 on garbage collection.
5513 *** The normal hook `post-gc-hook' is run at the end of garbage collection.
5515 The hook is run with GC inhibited, so use it with care.
5517 * New Packages for Lisp Programming in Emacs 22.1
5520 ** The new library button.el implements simple and fast `clickable
5521 buttons' in emacs buffers. Buttons are much lighter-weight than the
5522 `widgets' implemented by widget.el, and can be used by lisp code that
5523 doesn't require the full power of widgets. Emacs uses buttons for
5524 such things as help and apropos buffers.
5527 ** The new library tree-widget.el provides a widget to display a set
5528 of hierarchical data as an outline. For example, the tree-widget is
5529 well suited to display a hierarchy of directories and files.
5532 ** The new library bindat.el provides functions to unpack and pack
5533 binary data structures, such as network packets, to and from Lisp
5537 ** master-mode.el implements a minor mode for scrolling a slave
5538 buffer without leaving your current buffer, the master buffer.
5540 It can be used by sql.el, for example: the SQL buffer is the master
5541 and its SQLi buffer is the slave. This allows you to scroll the SQLi
5542 buffer containing the output from the SQL buffer containing the
5545 This is how to use sql.el and master.el together: the variable
5546 sql-buffer contains the slave buffer. It is a local variable in the
5549 (add-hook 'sql-mode-hook
5550 (function (lambda ()
5552 (master-set-slave sql-buffer))))
5553 (add-hook 'sql-set-sqli-hook
5554 (function (lambda ()
5555 (master-set-slave sql-buffer))))
5558 ** The new library benchmark.el does timing measurements on Lisp code.
5560 This includes measuring garbage collection time.
5563 ** The new library testcover.el does test coverage checking.
5565 This is so you can tell whether you've tested all paths in your Lisp
5566 code. It works with edebug.
5568 The function `testcover-start' instruments all functions in a given
5569 file. Then test your code. The function `testcover-mark-all' adds
5570 overlay "splotches" to the Lisp file's buffer to show where coverage
5571 is lacking. The command `testcover-next-mark' (bind it to a key!)
5572 will move point forward to the next spot that has a splotch.
5574 Normally, a red splotch indicates the form was never completely
5575 evaluated; a brown splotch means it always evaluated to the same
5576 value. The red splotches are skipped for forms that can't possibly
5577 complete their evaluation, such as `error'. The brown splotches are
5578 skipped for forms that are expected to always evaluate to the same
5579 value, such as (setq x 14).
5581 For difficult cases, you can add do-nothing macros to your code to
5582 help out the test coverage tool. The macro `noreturn' suppresses a
5583 red splotch. It is an error if the argument to `noreturn' does
5584 return. The macro `1value' suppresses a brown splotch for its argument.
5585 This macro is a no-op except during test-coverage -- then it signals
5586 an error if the argument actually returns differing values.
5588 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.3
5590 ** Support for GNU/Linux on little-endian MIPS and on IBM S390 has
5594 * Changes in Emacs 21.3
5596 ** The obsolete C mode (c-mode.el) has been removed to avoid problems
5599 ** UTF-16 coding systems are available, encoding the same characters
5602 ** There is a new language environment for UTF-8 (set up automatically
5605 ** Translation tables are available between equivalent characters in
5606 different Emacs charsets -- for instance `e with acute' coming from the
5607 Latin-1 and Latin-2 charsets. User options `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode'
5608 and `unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' respectively turn on translation
5609 between ISO 8859 character sets (`unification') on encoding
5610 (e.g. writing a file) and decoding (e.g. reading a file). Note that
5611 `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is useful and safe, but
5612 `unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' can cause text to change when you read
5613 it and write it out again without edits, so it is not generally advisable.
5614 By default `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is turned on.
5616 ** In Emacs running on the X window system, the default value of
5617 `selection-coding-system' is now `compound-text-with-extensions'.
5619 If you want the old behavior, set selection-coding-system to
5620 compound-text, which may be significantly more efficient. Using
5621 compound-text-with-extensions seems to be necessary only for decoding
5622 text from applications under XFree86 4.2, whose behavior is actually
5623 contrary to the compound text specification.
5626 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.2
5628 ** Support for BSD/OS 5.0 has been added.
5630 ** Support for AIX 5.1 was added.
5633 * Changes in Emacs 21.2
5635 ** Emacs now supports compound-text extended segments in X selections.
5637 X applications can use `extended segments' to encode characters in
5638 compound text that belong to character sets which are not part of the
5639 list of approved standard encodings for X, e.g. Big5. To paste
5640 selections with such characters into Emacs, use the new coding system
5641 compound-text-with-extensions as the value of selection-coding-system.
5643 ** The default values of `tooltip-delay' and `tooltip-hide-delay'
5646 ** On terminals whose erase-char is ^H (Backspace), Emacs
5647 now uses normal-erase-is-backspace-mode.
5649 ** When the *scratch* buffer is recreated, its mode is set from
5650 initial-major-mode, which normally is lisp-interaction-mode,
5651 instead of using default-major-mode.
5653 ** The new option `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' causes Info to behave
5654 like the stand-alone Info reader (from the GNU Texinfo package) as far
5655 as motion between nodes and their subnodes is concerned. If it is t
5656 (the default), Emacs behaves as before when you type SPC in a menu: it
5657 visits the subnode pointed to by the first menu entry. If this option
5658 is nil, SPC scrolls to the end of the current node, and only then goes
5659 to the first menu item, like the stand-alone reader does.
5661 This change was already in Emacs 21.1, but wasn't advertised in the
5665 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 21.2
5667 ** The meanings of scroll-up-aggressively and scroll-down-aggressively
5668 have been interchanged, so that the former now controls scrolling up,
5669 and the latter now controls scrolling down.
5671 ** The variable `compilation-parse-errors-filename-function' can
5672 be used to transform filenames found in compilation output.
5675 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
5677 See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and
5678 fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra
5679 charsets in this release.
5681 ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
5683 ** Support for LynxOS has been added.
5685 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for
5686 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
5689 ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
5690 support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
5691 maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
5692 build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
5693 necessary changes to unexec.
5695 ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
5696 Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
5698 ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
5699 Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5701 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
5702 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
5704 ** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
5705 all of the new display features described below. The port currently
5706 lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
5707 "Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
5708 description of aspects specific to the Mac.
5710 ** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
5711 new display features described below.
5714 * Changes in Emacs 21.1
5716 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
5718 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
5719 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
5720 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
5721 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
5724 ** Emacs has a new face implementation.
5726 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
5727 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
5728 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
5729 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
5732 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
5733 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
5734 under Lisp changes, below.
5736 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
5738 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
5739 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
5740 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
5741 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
5742 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
5743 attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
5746 The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
5747 supported on character terminals.
5749 Emacs automatically remaps all X-style color specifications to one of
5750 the colors supported by the terminal. This means you could have the
5751 same color customizations that work both on a windowed display and on
5752 a TTY or when Emacs is invoked with the -nw option.
5754 ** New default font is Courier 12pt under X.
5758 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
5759 driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
5760 supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
5761 You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' to enable
5764 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
5766 If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
5767 longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
5768 is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
5769 minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
5771 - User option: max-mini-window-height
5773 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
5774 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
5775 specifies a number of lines.
5779 - User option: resize-mini-windows
5781 How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5782 resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
5783 grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
5786 Default is `grow-only'.
5790 Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see
5791 <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92.26, or later.
5793 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
5795 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
5796 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
5799 ** File selection dialog on MS-Windows is supported.
5801 When a file is visited by clicking File->Open, the MS-Windows version
5802 now pops up a standard file selection dialog where you can select a
5803 file to visit. File->Save As also pops up that dialog.
5805 ** Toolkit scroll bars.
5807 Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for
5808 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when
5809 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
5810 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
5811 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
5814 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
5815 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
5816 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
5817 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
5818 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
5819 `s/freebsd.h' as an example.
5821 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
5822 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
5823 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
5824 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
5825 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
5826 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
5828 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
5829 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
5830 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
5831 imake configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
5832 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
5834 ** Tool bar support.
5836 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
5837 of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
5838 changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
5839 displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
5840 if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
5843 To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
5844 for specific modes (with copyright assignments).
5848 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
5849 mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
5850 turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
5852 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
5853 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
5854 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
5855 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
5857 ** Automatic Hscrolling
5859 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
5860 `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
5863 If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or
5864 scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound
5865 for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll
5866 the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more
5867 to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc.
5869 ** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
5870 of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is
5871 solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option
5872 `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the
5873 cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if
5874 non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown.
5876 ** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display
5877 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
5878 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
5879 customizing face `fringe'.
5881 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
5882 You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
5883 In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D
5884 appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line
5885 occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of
5886 the window to be partially obscured.)
5888 The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
5889 versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, is now deprecated.
5890 However, setting it to nil will cause the `mode-line' face to be
5891 ignored, and mode-lines to be drawn using the default text face.
5893 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
5895 Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all
5896 systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a
5897 mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the
5898 mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is
5899 displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you
5902 Currently, the following actions have been defined:
5904 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line goes to the next buffer.
5906 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name goes to the previous buffer.
5908 - Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
5909 `*') toggles the status.
5911 - Mouse-3 on the major mode name displays a major mode menu.
5913 - Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu.
5915 ** Hourglass pointer
5917 Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can
5918 turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
5922 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
5923 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
5924 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
5927 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
5929 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
5930 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
5931 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
5934 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
5935 have to do anything to activate it.
5937 ** The default binding of the Delete key has changed.
5939 The new user-option `normal-erase-is-backspace' can be set to
5940 determine the effect of the Delete and Backspace function keys.
5942 On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen
5943 according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace
5944 key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the
5945 option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to
5946 delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. On
5947 keyboards which either have only one key (usually labeled DEL), or two
5948 keys DEL and BS which produce the same effect, the option's value is
5949 set to nil, and these keys delete backward.
5951 If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes
5952 a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the
5953 Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via
5954 `keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on
5955 the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting on a text-only
5956 terminal if you don't have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys.
5958 Programmatically, you can call function normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
5959 to toggle the behavior of the Delete and Backspace keys.
5961 ** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
5962 changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
5965 ** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the
5966 current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the
5967 beginning and end of the buffer.
5969 ** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
5970 recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
5973 ** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
5974 file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
5976 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
5977 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
5980 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs's byte
5981 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
5984 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
5986 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
5987 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
5988 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
5990 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
5991 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
5992 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
5994 ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
5997 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
5999 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
6000 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
6001 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
6002 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
6003 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
6006 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
6007 all frames except the selected one.
6009 ** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to
6010 let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting.
6012 ** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs
6013 header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window),
6014 so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled.
6015 This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option
6016 `Info-use-header-line'.
6018 ** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card
6019 have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex',
6020 `de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included.
6022 ** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available.
6024 ** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
6025 `dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in
6028 ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
6029 displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
6030 menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
6031 menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
6033 ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable through Customize.
6035 You can no longer use `M-x customize-variable' to customize `load-path'
6036 because it now contains a version-dependent component. You can still
6037 use `add-to-list' and `setq' to customize this variable in your
6038 `~/.emacs' init file or to modify it from any Lisp program in general.
6040 ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
6041 point in a pop-up window.
6043 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
6044 under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or
6045 customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'.
6047 The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount'
6048 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
6050 ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
6051 sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
6052 (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
6053 You can customize `auto-save-list-file-prefix' to change this location.
6055 ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
6057 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
6058 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
6060 ** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
6061 trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
6062 this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
6064 ** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
6065 be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is
6068 ** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
6069 set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
6070 file that is already visited under a different name.
6072 ** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
6073 nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
6075 ** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
6076 and displays information about that.
6078 ** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
6079 expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
6081 This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
6082 determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
6083 mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
6084 interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
6085 regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
6086 associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
6088 ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
6089 suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
6091 ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
6092 buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
6093 contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
6094 by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
6095 insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
6096 the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
6097 Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
6099 ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
6100 been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
6102 ** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding
6103 system for keyboard input.
6105 ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
6106 coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
6107 escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
6108 such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
6109 recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
6110 always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
6111 read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
6112 (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
6113 RET C-x C-f filename RET.
6115 ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
6116 environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
6118 ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
6119 displays all characters in that character set.
6121 ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
6122 coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
6124 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
6125 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
6126 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
6128 ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
6129 Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
6130 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
6131 GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have
6132 8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts.
6133 There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only)
6136 ** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'.
6137 These new environments mainly select appropriate translations
6140 ** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for
6141 function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs
6142 Lisp Coding Convention".
6144 new command old-binding
6145 --- ------- -----------
6146 f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5
6147 S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5
6148 C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5
6150 f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged
6151 S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged
6152 C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged
6154 S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3
6155 S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6
6156 S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7
6157 S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8
6158 S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged
6159 C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2
6161 ** There are new Leim input methods.
6162 New input methods "turkish-postfix", "turkish-alt-postfix",
6163 "greek-mizuochi", "TeX", and "greek-babel" are now part of the Leim
6166 ** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the
6167 rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus
6168 typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating
6169 "=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input
6170 "`", you must type "=q".
6172 ** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
6173 8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
6174 more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
6175 empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
6176 window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
6179 ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
6180 on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
6181 defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
6182 commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
6184 ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
6185 `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
6186 indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
6187 indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
6189 ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
6190 on the display using several methods
6192 - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
6193 a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
6194 be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
6196 - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
6197 equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
6199 - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
6201 - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
6202 the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
6204 ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
6205 an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
6206 command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
6207 does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
6209 ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
6210 `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
6211 typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
6213 ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
6214 characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
6216 ** New X resources recognized
6218 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
6219 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
6220 is useful for debugging X problems.
6224 emacs.synchronous: true
6226 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
6227 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
6228 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
6229 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
6230 visual class names are
6239 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
6240 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
6243 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
6244 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
6245 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
6250 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
6252 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
6253 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
6254 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
6255 resource values are `true' or `on'.
6259 emacs.privateColormap: true
6261 ** Faces and frame parameters.
6263 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
6264 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
6265 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
6266 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
6267 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
6268 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
6269 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
6271 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
6272 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
6273 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
6274 `default' face and vice versa.
6278 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
6280 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
6282 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
6283 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
6284 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
6285 the screen gamma of a frame's display.
6287 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
6288 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
6289 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
6291 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
6294 ** Tabs and variable-width text.
6296 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
6297 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
6298 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
6299 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
6301 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
6303 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
6305 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
6307 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
6310 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
6313 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
6315 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
6316 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
6317 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
6319 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
6320 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi and Less).
6322 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
6323 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
6324 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
6326 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
6328 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
6329 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
6330 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
6331 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
6333 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
6334 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a
6335 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
6336 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
6338 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
6339 M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
6340 M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
6343 ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
6345 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
6346 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
6347 `directory-abbrev-alist'.
6349 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
6350 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
6351 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
6352 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
6353 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
6354 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
6356 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
6358 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
6359 notably at the end of lines.
6361 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
6362 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
6364 ** The function `replace-rectangle' is an alias for `string-rectangle'.
6366 ** The new command M-x string-insert-rectangle is like `string-rectangle',
6367 but inserts text instead of replacing it.
6369 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
6370 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
6371 after each match to get the replacement text.
6373 ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
6374 you edit the replacement string.
6376 ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB'
6377 (if you load the library `mailabbrev'), lets you complete mail aliases
6378 in the text, analogous to lisp-complete-symbol.
6380 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
6382 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
6383 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
6385 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
6386 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
6387 MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
6388 displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
6391 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
6392 read mail from the menu etc.
6394 ** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows.
6395 This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on
6396 MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made
6397 before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now.
6399 ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
6400 MS-DOS version of Emacs.
6402 ** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces the MS-DOS version
6403 of Emacs to behave as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons.
6404 This comes handy with mice that don't report their number of buttons
6405 correctly. One example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons,
6406 but clicks on the middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version
6409 ** Customize changes
6411 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
6412 `State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to
6413 M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that
6414 customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in
6415 earlier versions of Emacs.
6417 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
6418 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
6421 *** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it
6422 does not allow you to save customizations in your `~/.emacs' init
6423 file. This is because saving customizations from such a session would
6424 wipe out all the other customizationss you might have on your init
6427 ** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it
6428 does not save disabled and enabled commands for future sessions, to
6429 avoid overwriting existing customizations of this kind that are
6430 already in your init file.
6432 ** New features in evaluation commands
6434 *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
6435 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
6436 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the new
6437 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
6438 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
6440 The default values for the first two of these variables are 12 and 4
6441 respectively, which means that `eval-expression' now prints at most
6442 the first 12 members of a list and at most 4 nesting levels deep (if
6443 the list is longer or deeper than that, an ellipsis `...' is
6446 <RET> or <mouse-2> on the printed text toggles between an abbreviated
6447 printed representation and an unabbreviated one.
6449 The default value of eval-expression-debug-on-error is t, so any error
6450 during evaluation produces a backtrace.
6452 *** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
6453 code when called with a prefix argument.
6457 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
6458 current user setups (although it's believed that these
6459 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
6460 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
6461 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
6462 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
6465 *** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone.
6466 CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode
6467 is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much
6470 However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the
6471 default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for
6472 java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't
6473 notice the change if you haven't touched that variable.
6475 *** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall.
6476 Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list:
6478 space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening
6479 parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)".
6481 compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening
6482 parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function.
6483 It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the
6484 style "foo (bar)" and "foo()".
6486 *** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation.
6487 Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made
6488 "electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an
6489 earlier statement. An example:
6491 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
6493 res += a[i]->offset;
6496 Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it
6497 continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after
6498 the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's
6499 possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of
6502 CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on
6505 *** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings.
6506 Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which
6507 meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing
6508 documentation or other natural language text.
6510 The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that
6511 contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in
6512 the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline
6513 strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed
6514 to other strings that typically contain format specifications,
6515 commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses
6516 sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway.
6518 *** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode.
6519 Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the
6520 source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in
6521 comment prefixes and paragraph starts.
6523 *** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific.
6524 When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment
6525 line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This
6526 change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in
6529 *** Better handling of syntactic errors.
6530 The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been
6531 improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message
6532 stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the
6533 following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no
6534 matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while
6535 indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error
6536 is reported afterwards.
6538 *** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns.
6539 A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by
6540 returning a vector with the desired column as the first element.
6542 *** More robust and warning-free byte compilation.
6543 Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending
6544 on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now
6545 can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some
6546 code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the
6547 modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the
6550 *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
6551 This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
6552 of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
6553 non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
6554 want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
6557 Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
6558 situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
6559 and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
6560 If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
6561 the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
6562 by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
6564 *** New initialization procedure for the style system.
6565 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
6566 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
6567 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
6568 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
6569 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
6570 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
6571 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
6573 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
6574 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
6575 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
6576 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
6579 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
6580 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
6581 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
6582 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
6583 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
6584 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
6585 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
6586 function documentation for more info.
6588 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
6589 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
6590 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
6591 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
6592 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
6593 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
6594 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
6595 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
6597 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
6599 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
6600 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
6602 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
6603 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
6604 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
6605 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
6606 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
6609 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
6610 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
6611 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
6614 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
6615 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
6616 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
6617 chapter about this in the manual.
6619 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
6620 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
6621 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
6622 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
6623 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
6625 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
6626 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
6627 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
6629 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
6630 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
6632 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
6633 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
6634 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
6637 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
6638 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
6639 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
6640 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
6643 **** The variables `c-hanging-comment-starter-p' and
6644 `c-hanging-comment-ender-p', which controlled how comment starters and
6645 enders were filled, are not used anymore. The new version of the
6646 function `c-fill-paragraph' keeps the comment starters and enders as
6647 they were before the filling.
6649 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
6650 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
6651 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
6654 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
6655 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
6656 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
6657 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
6660 *** Fixes to IDL mode.
6661 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
6662 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
6663 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
6664 Thanks to Eric Eide.
6666 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
6667 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
6668 opening braces hangs and when they don't.
6670 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
6672 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
6673 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
6674 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
6675 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
6677 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
6678 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
6679 the column specified by comment-column.
6681 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
6682 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
6683 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
6684 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
6685 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
6686 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
6688 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
6689 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
6692 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
6694 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
6695 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
6696 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
6697 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
6700 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
6704 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
6705 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
6706 is, delete only empty directories.
6708 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
6709 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
6710 copy directories recursively.
6712 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
6713 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
6714 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
6716 *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
6717 replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
6720 *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `y') shows
6721 a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
6722 This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
6723 will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
6724 accurate or inaccurate as it is.
6726 *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
6729 *** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
6730 of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
6731 which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
6732 source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
6736 The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
6737 four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
6738 internationalization and mail-fetching.
6740 *** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
6741 many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
6743 If you used procmail like in
6745 (setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
6746 (setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
6747 (setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
6748 (setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
6750 this now has changed to
6753 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
6756 More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
6757 Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
6759 *** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
6760 Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
6761 Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no
6762 longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
6764 The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to
6765 use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was
6766 installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier.
6768 *** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
6769 parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
6770 are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
6771 now just a compatibility layer.
6773 *** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
6776 *** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
6777 called to position point.
6779 *** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
6780 summary buffers and NOV files.
6782 *** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
6783 of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
6785 *** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
6786 subtly different manner.
6788 *** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
6789 and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
6790 ever-changing layouts.
6792 *** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
6794 *** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
6796 ** Changes in Texinfo mode.
6798 *** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
6802 -------------------------
6806 C-c C-c q @quotation
6808 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
6811 *** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
6813 ** Changes in Outline mode.
6815 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
6816 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
6817 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
6819 ** Changes to Emacs Server
6821 *** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
6822 with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
6823 are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
6824 Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
6825 buffers to kill, as before.
6827 Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
6828 i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
6831 ** Both emacsclient and Emacs itself now accept command line options
6832 of the form +LINE:COLUMN in addition to +LINE.
6834 ** Changes to Show Paren mode.
6836 *** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
6837 The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
6838 use. Default is 1000.
6840 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
6841 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
6843 ** Changes to hideshow.el
6845 *** Generalized block selection and traversal
6847 A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings),
6848 and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp
6849 serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate.
6850 See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'.
6852 *** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active,
6853 hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can
6854 be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of
6857 *** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a
6858 function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of
6859 the normal block-hiding function.
6861 *** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed.
6863 *** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions,
6864 roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix
6865 for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation
6866 for `hs-minor-mode'.
6868 *** The variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' has been removed, and
6869 hideshow.el now always behaves as if this variable were set to t.
6871 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
6873 *** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
6874 an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
6875 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
6877 **** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
6880 *** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
6883 *** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
6884 entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
6885 Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
6886 version number is performed based on regular expressions from
6887 `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized.
6888 Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
6890 *** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
6892 ** Changes to cmuscheme
6894 *** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
6895 `cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
6897 ** Changes in Font Lock
6899 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
6900 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
6902 *** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should
6903 set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults.
6905 *** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
6906 the face used for each string/comment.
6908 *** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
6909 Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
6911 ** Changes to Shell mode
6913 *** The `shell' command now accepts an optional argument to specify the buffer
6914 to use, which defaults to "*shell*". When used interactively, a
6915 non-default buffer may be specified by giving the `shell' command a
6916 prefix argument (causing it to prompt for the buffer name).
6918 ** Comint (subshell) changes
6920 These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
6921 include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
6923 *** Comint now by default interprets some carriage-control characters.
6924 Comint now removes CRs from CR LF sequences, and treats single CRs and
6925 BSs in the output in a way similar to a terminal (by deleting to the
6926 beginning of the line, or deleting the previous character,
6927 respectively). This is achieved by adding `comint-carriage-motion' to
6928 the `comint-output-filter-functions' hook by default.
6930 *** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
6931 to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
6932 parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
6933 user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
6934 this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
6935 respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
6936 feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
6937 `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
6939 *** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
6940 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
6942 *** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
6943 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
6944 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
6946 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
6947 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
6948 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
6950 *** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
6951 and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
6952 see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
6954 *** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
6955 saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
6956 argument, it appends to the file.
6958 *** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
6959 (usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
6962 *** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
6965 *** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for
6966 identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp
6967 strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#".
6969 ** Changes to Rmail mode
6971 *** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
6972 set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when
6973 receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
6974 recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
6975 `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
6978 Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
6979 mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
6980 regexp matching your mail addresses.
6982 *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
6983 to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
6984 Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
6985 with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
6986 for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
6988 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
6991 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
6992 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
6995 *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
6996 in which folder to put messages automatically.
6998 *** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message
6999 with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly
7000 due to missing or malformed "charset=" header.
7002 ** The new user-option `mail-envelope-from' can be used to specify
7003 an envelope-from address different from user-mail-address.
7005 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
7006 use the -f option when sending mail.
7008 ** The Rmail command `o' (`rmail-output-to-rmail-file') now writes the
7009 current message in the internal `emacs-mule' encoding, rather than in
7010 the encoding taken from the variable `buffer-file-coding-system'.
7011 This allows to save messages whose characters cannot be safely encoded
7012 by the buffer's coding system, and makes sure the message will be
7013 displayed correctly when you later visit the target Rmail file.
7015 If you want your Rmail files be encoded in a specific coding system
7016 other than `emacs-mule', you can customize the variable
7017 `rmail-file-coding-system' to set its value to that coding system.
7019 ** Changes to TeX mode
7021 *** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
7024 *** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
7026 *** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
7028 *** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
7030 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
7032 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
7033 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
7034 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
7035 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
7036 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
7037 can be edited from that buffer.
7039 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
7040 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
7041 `A' to use all marked entries).
7043 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
7044 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
7046 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
7047 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
7048 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
7051 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
7052 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
7053 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
7054 in column 1 are always made leaves.
7056 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
7057 has the following new features:
7059 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
7060 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
7061 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
7062 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
7064 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
7065 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
7066 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
7067 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
7068 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
7071 ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
7076 *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
7077 transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
7078 spell-checks the current buffer.
7080 *** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
7083 *** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
7084 correction is made and re-checked.
7086 *** Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definitions have been added.
7088 *** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
7091 *** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
7094 *** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
7097 *** Spell checking now works in the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
7099 ** Makefile mode changes
7101 *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
7103 *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
7104 Fontlock mode is active.
7108 *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
7109 so that searches can be resumed.
7111 *** In Isearch mode, C-M-s and C-M-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
7112 respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
7113 that started the search.
7115 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
7116 selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
7118 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
7120 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
7121 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
7122 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
7123 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
7124 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
7125 `secondary-selection'.
7127 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
7128 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
7129 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
7130 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
7131 usual snappy response.
7133 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
7134 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
7135 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
7136 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
7140 VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
7141 easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
7142 Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
7143 to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
7144 changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
7145 `vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify
7146 version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
7147 each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
7148 file is registered in that backend.
7150 When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
7151 backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
7152 directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
7153 master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
7154 the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
7155 As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
7157 The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
7158 still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
7159 RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
7160 vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
7161 where it doesn't make sense.)
7163 The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
7164 obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
7165 `CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
7169 The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
7170 checks are always done now.
7172 VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
7175 `vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
7176 `vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
7177 `vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
7179 The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
7180 first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
7181 current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
7182 the working file (``merge news'').
7184 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
7185 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
7188 *** Multiple Backends
7190 VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
7191 useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
7192 repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
7193 commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
7196 To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
7197 should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
7198 backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
7199 `vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
7201 You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing
7202 C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as
7203 a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend
7204 if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the
7205 current revision number from the more remote backend.
7207 If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
7208 another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
7209 any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
7210 pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
7212 After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
7213 changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
7214 local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
7215 buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
7219 There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
7220 default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
7221 remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
7222 by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
7223 regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
7224 that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
7225 queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
7227 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
7228 repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
7229 revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
7230 any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
7231 backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
7232 number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
7233 (vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
7234 of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
7235 the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
7236 automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
7237 since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
7240 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
7241 repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
7242 If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
7243 commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
7244 current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
7245 entire directory tree.
7247 The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
7248 "cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
7249 is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
7250 "watched" by other developers.)
7252 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
7253 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
7254 an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
7255 starting at the given directory.
7257 *** Lisp Changes in VC
7259 VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
7260 add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
7261 library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
7262 then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
7263 a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which
7264 provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top
7265 of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
7266 you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol
7267 `SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
7269 ** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT
7270 SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more
7271 terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs.
7272 See etc/edt-user.doc for more information.
7274 ** New modes and packages
7276 *** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'
7277 automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when
7278 the default is not applicable.
7280 *** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
7281 rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
7282 shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
7286 - Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
7287 drawn, like this: | \ /
7291 - Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
7292 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
7293 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
7294 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
7295 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
7298 - Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
7299 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
7301 - Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
7304 - Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
7305 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
7306 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
7307 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
7309 - Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
7310 also do without the mouse.
7312 - Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
7313 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
7314 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
7315 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
7316 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
7318 - Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
7320 lines straight-lines
7322 poly-lines straight poly-lines
7324 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
7325 spray-can setting size for spraying
7326 vaporize line vaporize lines
7327 erase characters erase rectangles
7329 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
7330 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
7331 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
7334 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
7335 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
7336 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
7337 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
7339 - Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
7342 *** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
7343 implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
7344 It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
7345 functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
7346 history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
7347 will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
7348 the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
7349 rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
7350 all within the scope of your Emacs process.
7352 *** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
7353 intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
7354 typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
7355 on certain projects.
7357 *** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches
7358 of interactively entered regexps. For example,
7360 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
7362 will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
7363 face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
7364 typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
7365 Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
7366 appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
7367 current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
7368 corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches
7369 to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match.
7371 *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
7374 *** The new package tildify.el allows to add hard spaces or other text
7375 fragments in accordance with the current major mode.
7377 *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
7378 parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
7380 *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
7381 package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
7382 be more robust while offering the same functionality.
7383 `comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
7384 comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
7386 *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
7387 facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
7388 separate Texinfo file.
7390 *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
7391 by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
7392 provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
7393 `log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
7394 enter check-in log messages.
7396 *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
7397 without invoking external programs.
7399 The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
7400 and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
7401 `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
7402 is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
7403 Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
7405 The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
7406 page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
7408 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
7409 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
7411 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
7412 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
7413 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
7414 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
7415 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
7418 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
7419 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
7420 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
7421 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
7423 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
7424 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
7425 actually modifying content of a buffer.
7427 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
7430 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
7432 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
7434 ; comment (until end of line)
7438 $A default non-terminal
7439 $"C" default terminal
7440 $?C? default special
7441 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
7442 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
7443 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
7444 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
7445 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
7446 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
7447 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
7448 C+ one or more occurrences of C
7449 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
7450 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
7451 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
7452 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
7453 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
7454 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
7455 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
7457 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
7459 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
7460 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
7461 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
7462 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
7463 equal signs of assignments.
7465 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
7466 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
7468 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
7469 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
7470 buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'.
7472 *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
7474 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
7475 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
7476 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
7477 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
7478 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
7479 which answers different needs.
7481 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
7482 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
7483 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
7484 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
7485 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
7488 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
7489 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
7491 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
7493 *** hl-line.el provides `hl-line-mode', a minor mode to highlight the
7494 current line in the current buffer. It also provides
7495 `global-hl-line-mode' to provide the same behavior in all buffers.
7497 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
7499 Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and
7500 `global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
7501 disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
7502 `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
7503 displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
7504 and background colors.
7506 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
7509 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
7512 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
7514 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
7516 *** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus
7517 whitespace in a file.
7519 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
7520 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
7521 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
7522 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
7523 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
7524 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
7525 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
7527 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
7529 Here is an example of columns:
7532 dog pineapple car EXTRA
7533 porcupine strawberry airplane
7535 Doing the following settings:
7537 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
7538 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
7539 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
7540 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
7543 Selecting the lines above and typing:
7545 M-x delimit-columns-region
7549 [ horse , apple , bus , ]
7550 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
7551 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
7553 delim-col has the following options:
7555 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
7558 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
7559 between each column.
7561 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
7564 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
7567 delim-col has the following commands:
7569 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
7570 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
7572 *** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were
7573 operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a
7574 menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the
7575 recent file list can be displayed:
7577 - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
7578 - sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending.
7579 - showing paths relative to the current default-directory
7581 The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
7582 dynamically change the menu appearance.
7584 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
7587 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
7588 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
7589 specific to Message mode.
7591 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
7592 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
7593 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
7595 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
7596 interface to access directory servers using different directory
7597 protocols. It has a separate manual.
7599 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
7600 for Autoconf, selected automatically.
7602 *** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
7604 *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
7605 minibuffer with completion.
7607 *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
7608 with the diary features.
7610 *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
7611 numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
7613 *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
7616 *** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
7617 facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
7618 difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
7619 they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
7621 *** antlr-mode is a new major mode for editing ANTLR grammar files.
7622 It is automatically turned on for files whose names have the extension
7625 ** Changes in sort.el
7627 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
7628 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
7629 new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
7632 ** Changes to Ange-ftp
7634 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
7635 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
7636 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
7638 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
7639 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
7641 *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
7642 output ^M at the end of lines.
7644 ** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
7645 mode `iswitchb-mode'.
7647 ** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore.
7648 If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with
7651 ** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom
7654 ** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the
7655 behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values
7658 `untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space;
7659 `hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces;
7660 `all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines;
7661 nil -- just delete one character.
7663 Default value is `untabify'.
7665 [This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.]
7667 ** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face
7668 symbol, not double-quoted.
7670 ** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future
7671 version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline,
7672 profile, rnews, rnewspost, and sc. Their implementations have been
7673 moved to lisp/obsolete.
7675 ** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
7676 To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
7677 `auto-compression-mode' command.
7679 ** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
7680 `browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME, and
7681 `browse-url-kde' can be chosen for invoking the KDE browser.
7683 ** The user-option `browse-url-new-window-p' has been renamed to
7684 `browse-url-new-window-flag'.
7686 ** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
7687 operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
7689 ** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
7690 is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
7692 ** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
7693 support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
7694 use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
7695 buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
7696 M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
7697 new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
7699 ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
7700 a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
7702 ** Hexl mode allows to insert non-ASCII characters.
7704 The non-ASCII characters are encoded using the same encoding as the
7705 file you are visiting in Hexl mode.
7707 ** Shell script mode changes.
7709 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
7710 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and
7711 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
7715 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
7717 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
7718 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
7719 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
7720 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
7721 a regular expression. The manual contains details.
7723 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
7724 declarations when given the --declarations option.
7726 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
7727 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
7729 *** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags
7730 automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or
7731 `template' keywords.
7733 *** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in
7734 C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels.
7736 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
7739 *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
7741 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
7743 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
7746 *** In makefiles, tags the targets.
7748 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
7749 variables are tagged.
7751 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
7753 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
7756 ** Changes in etags.el
7758 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
7759 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
7760 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
7762 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
7763 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
7765 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
7766 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
7767 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
7768 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
7770 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
7772 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
7773 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
7775 A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
7777 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
7778 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
7779 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
7781 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
7782 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
7784 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
7785 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
7787 *** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
7788 If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
7789 /tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
7790 "dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name,
7791 point will go to the beginning of the file.
7793 *** Compressed files are now transparently supported if
7794 auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search
7795 (with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files.
7797 *** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point
7798 in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is
7799 found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring.
7801 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
7802 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
7803 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
7805 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
7807 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
7809 ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
7810 containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
7811 expression from that list, are not checked.
7813 ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
7814 When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
7815 and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
7816 the buffer, just like for the local files.
7818 ** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
7820 ** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
7821 displays local abbrevs, only.
7823 ** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
7824 paragraphs filled as you modify them.
7826 ** The variable `double-click-fuzz' specifies how much the mouse
7827 may be moved between clicks that are recognized as a pair. Its value
7828 is measured in pixels.
7830 ** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
7831 to be visited as images.
7833 ** Two new user-options `grep-command' and `grep-find-command'
7834 were added to compile.el.
7836 ** Withdrawn packages
7838 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
7839 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
7841 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
7843 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
7846 * Incompatible Lisp changes
7848 There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
7849 may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
7850 See the sections below for details.
7852 ** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
7853 `(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties.
7854 Use `copy-sequence' to copy the string, then use `set-text-properties'
7855 to remove the properties of the copy.
7857 ** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
7858 which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
7859 may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
7860 these properties are active.
7862 ** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
7863 ranges may affect some code.
7865 ** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
7866 buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
7867 make a difference to some code.
7869 ** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
7870 operates on the minibuffer.
7872 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
7873 cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
7874 different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
7875 (previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
7876 Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
7877 character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
7878 multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
7879 encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
7880 reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
7881 sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
7882 a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
7883 the buffer as multibyte characters.
7885 Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
7886 MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
7887 appropriate for reading truly binary files.
7889 ** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and
7890 `after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use
7891 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead.
7893 ** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as
7894 long promised. So does any code that uses derivatives of `concat',
7895 such as `mapconcat'.
7897 ** The function base64-decode-string now always returns a unibyte
7900 ** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of
7901 extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new
7902 dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than
7903 one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard
7904 charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes
7905 the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule
7906 encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will
7907 probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21.
7909 ** The variable `directory-sep-char' is slated for removal.
7910 Not really a change (yet), but a projected one that you should be
7911 aware of: The variable `directory-sep-char' is deprecated, and should
7912 not be used. It was always ignored on GNU/Linux and Unix systems and
7913 on MS-DOS, but the MS-Windows port tried to support it by adapting the
7914 behavior of certain primitives to the value of this variable. It
7915 turned out that such support cannot be reliable, so it was decided to
7916 remove this variable in the near future. Lisp programs are well
7917 advised not to set it to anything but '/', because any different value
7918 will not have any effect when support for this variable is removed.
7921 * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
7922 (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
7924 ** Function assq-delete-all replaces function assoc-delete-all.
7926 ** The new function animate-string, from lisp/play/animate.el
7927 allows the animated display of strings.
7929 ** The new function `interactive-form' can be used to obtain the
7930 interactive form of a function.
7932 ** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
7933 between custom options. Example:
7935 (defcustom default-input-method nil
7936 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
7937 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
7938 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
7940 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
7941 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
7943 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
7944 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
7945 first in a custom-set-variables statement.
7947 ** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of
7948 function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no
7949 args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated
7950 (signal or normal termination).
7952 ** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements
7953 from a list are now available without requiring the CL package.
7955 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
7956 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
7958 ** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
7959 alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
7961 ** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
7963 ** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
7964 deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
7967 ** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
7969 ** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
7970 If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
7971 skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
7972 with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
7973 C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
7976 ** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
7977 the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
7980 ** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
7981 expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
7983 ** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
7984 with the more general `:mask' property.
7986 ** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's.
7988 ** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
7991 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
7992 is running in batch mode. For example,
7994 (message "%s" (read t))
7996 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
7999 ** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
8000 `kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
8002 ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
8003 will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
8006 ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
8009 - Function: remove ELT SEQ
8011 Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
8012 a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
8014 - Function: remq ELT LIST
8016 Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The
8017 comparison is done with `eq'.
8019 ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
8021 ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
8022 has been changed: WEAK can now have new values `key-or-value' and
8023 `key-and-value', in addition to `nil', `key', `value', and `t'.
8025 ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
8026 without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
8027 convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
8029 ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
8030 or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
8032 ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
8033 function was declared obsolete.
8035 ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
8036 retained as an alias).
8038 ** Easy-menu's :filter now takes the unconverted form of the menu and
8039 the result is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
8041 ** The new function `window-list' has been defined
8043 - Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
8045 Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
8046 omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
8047 the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
8048 even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
8049 minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
8050 means never include the minibuffer window.
8052 ** There's a new function `get-window-with-predicate' defined as follows
8054 - Function: get-window-with-predicate PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
8056 Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
8058 This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
8059 calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
8060 argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
8061 value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
8064 Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
8065 if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
8066 it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
8067 minibuffer even if it is active.
8069 Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
8070 counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
8071 too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
8072 and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
8073 `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
8074 entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
8076 ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
8077 ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
8078 ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
8079 ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
8080 ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
8081 If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
8082 Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
8084 ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
8085 event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
8086 argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
8088 ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
8089 call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
8090 message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
8091 Default value is nil.
8093 ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
8096 ** The new user option `line-number-display-limit-width' controls
8097 the maximum width of lines in a buffer for which Emacs displays line
8098 numbers in the mode line. The default is 200.
8100 ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
8101 coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
8102 DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
8104 ** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
8105 list of a primitive.
8107 ** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
8109 ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
8110 buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
8111 This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
8112 than replacing the local map.
8114 ** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and
8115 `after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been
8116 removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions'
8119 ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
8121 ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
8122 as promised long ago.
8124 ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
8126 ** The new variable auto-coding-regexp-alist specifies coding systems
8127 for reading specific files, analogous to auto-coding-alist, but
8128 patterns are checked against file contents instead of file names.
8131 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
8133 ** The new package rx.el provides an alternative sexp notation for
8134 regular expressions.
8136 - Function: rx-to-string SEXP
8138 Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation.
8142 Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation.
8144 The following are valid subforms of regular expressions in sexp
8148 matches string STRING literally.
8151 matches character CHAR literally.
8154 matches any character except a newline.
8157 matches any character
8160 matches any character in SET. SET may be a character or string.
8161 Ranges of characters can be specified as `A-Z' in strings.
8167 matches any character not in SET
8170 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a line
8171 in the text being matched
8174 is similar to `line-start' but matches only at the end of a line
8177 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the
8178 string being matched against.
8181 matches the empty string, but only at the end of the
8182 string being matched against.
8185 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the
8186 buffer being matched against.
8189 matches the empty string, but only at the end of the
8190 buffer being matched against.
8193 matches the empty string, but only at point.
8196 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a
8200 matches the empty string, but only at the end of a word.
8203 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a
8206 `(not word-boundary)'
8207 matches the empty string, but not at the beginning or end of a
8211 matches 0 through 9.
8214 matches ASCII control characters.
8217 matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
8220 matches space and tab only.
8223 matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
8227 matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
8231 matches letters and digits. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8232 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
8235 matches letters. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8236 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
8239 matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
8242 matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
8245 matches anything lower-case.
8248 matches anything upper-case.
8251 matches punctuation. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8252 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
8255 matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
8258 matches anything that has word syntax.
8261 matches a character with syntax SYNTAX. SYNTAX must be one
8262 of the following symbols.
8264 `whitespace' (\\s- in string notation)
8265 `punctuation' (\\s.)
8268 `open-parenthesis' (\\s()
8269 `close-parenthesis' (\\s))
8270 `expression-prefix' (\\s')
8271 `string-quote' (\\s\")
8272 `paired-delimiter' (\\s$)
8274 `character-quote' (\\s/)
8275 `comment-start' (\\s<)
8276 `comment-end' (\\s>)
8278 `(not (syntax SYNTAX))'
8279 matches a character that has not syntax SYNTAX.
8281 `(category CATEGORY)'
8282 matches a character with category CATEGORY. CATEGORY must be
8283 either a character to use for C, or one of the following symbols.
8285 `consonant' (\\c0 in string notation)
8287 `upper-diacritical-mark' (\\c2)
8288 `lower-diacritical-mark' (\\c3)
8292 `vowel-modifying-diacritical-mark' (\\c7)
8294 `semivowel-lower' (\\c9)
8295 `not-at-end-of-line' (\\c<)
8296 `not-at-beginning-of-line' (\\c>)
8297 `alpha-numeric-two-byte' (\\cA)
8298 `chinse-two-byte' (\\cC)
8299 `greek-two-byte' (\\cG)
8300 `japanese-hiragana-two-byte' (\\cH)
8301 `indian-two-byte' (\\cI)
8302 `japanese-katakana-two-byte' (\\cK)
8303 `korean-hangul-two-byte' (\\cN)
8304 `cyrillic-two-byte' (\\cY)
8313 `japanese-katakana' (\\ck)
8317 `japanese-roman' (\\cr)
8324 `(not (category CATEGORY))'
8325 matches a character that has not category CATEGORY.
8327 `(and SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
8328 matches what SEXP1 matches, followed by what SEXP2 matches, etc.
8330 `(submatch SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
8331 like `and', but makes the match accessible with `match-end',
8332 `match-beginning', and `match-string'.
8334 `(group SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
8335 another name for `submatch'.
8337 `(or SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
8338 matches anything that matches SEXP1 or SEXP2, etc. If all
8339 args are strings, use `regexp-opt' to optimize the resulting
8342 `(minimal-match SEXP)'
8343 produce a non-greedy regexp for SEXP. Normally, regexps matching
8344 zero or more occurrences of something are \"greedy\" in that they
8345 match as much as they can, as long as the overall regexp can
8346 still match. A non-greedy regexp matches as little as possible.
8348 `(maximal-match SEXP)'
8349 produce a greedy regexp for SEXP. This is the default.
8351 `(zero-or-more SEXP)'
8352 matches zero or more occurrences of what SEXP matches.
8355 like `zero-or-more'.
8358 like `zero-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp.
8361 like `zero-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
8363 `(one-or-more SEXP)'
8364 matches one or more occurrences of A.
8370 like `one-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp.
8373 like `one-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
8375 `(zero-or-one SEXP)'
8376 matches zero or one occurrences of A.
8382 like `zero-or-one', but always produces a greedy regexp.
8385 like `zero-or-one', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
8388 matches N occurrences of what SEXP matches.
8391 matches N to M occurrences of what SEXP matches.
8394 evaluate FORM and insert result. If result is a string,
8398 include REGEXP in string notation in the result.
8400 *** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default.
8402 *** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
8403 buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
8404 the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
8405 restriction to be restored incorrectly.
8407 *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
8408 `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
8409 when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a
8410 multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
8412 *** The functions `set-buffer-multibyte', `string-as-multibyte' and
8413 `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer or a string
8414 if it contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
8416 *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
8417 changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
8418 [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
8419 regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
8420 the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
8421 extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
8422 bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
8425 ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
8427 A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for
8428 a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
8429 character set as previously.
8431 *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
8432 They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
8433 modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
8435 CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
8436 characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
8437 range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
8438 case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
8440 FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
8441 name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font.
8443 *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
8444 registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
8447 *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
8448 argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
8450 ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
8451 composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
8452 buffers and strings.
8454 *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
8455 character' which is an independent character with a unique character
8456 code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
8457 have been deleted: composite-char-component,
8458 composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
8459 composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
8460 The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
8463 *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
8464 specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
8465 `reference-point-alist' for more detail.
8467 *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
8468 MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
8469 composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
8470 may differ between buffer and string text.
8472 *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
8473 COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
8475 *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
8476 directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
8477 Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
8478 `composition' from STRING.
8480 *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
8481 a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
8483 *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
8486 ** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on
8487 the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text.
8489 ** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
8490 `mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been
8491 introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF,
8492 U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
8494 Note that the character sets are not yet unified in Emacs, so
8495 characters which belong to charsets such as Latin-2, Greek, Hebrew,
8496 etc. and the same characters in the `mule-unicode-*' charsets are
8497 different characters, as far as Emacs is concerned. For example, text
8498 which includes Unicode characters from the Latin-2 locale cannot be
8499 encoded by Emacs with ISO 8859-2 coding system.
8501 ** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added.
8502 It provides limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For
8503 details, please see the documentation string of this coding system.
8505 ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
8506 `japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese
8507 standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
8509 ** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15'
8510 have been introduced.
8512 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
8513 have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
8514 0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of
8515 eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the
8516 emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the
8517 buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for
8518 eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string
8519 must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to
8520 their multibyte equivalent.
8522 ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
8523 that offset in the file before writing.
8525 ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
8526 compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
8528 ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
8529 `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
8530 from which the command was issued.
8532 ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
8533 `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
8534 `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
8535 additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
8538 ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
8539 to `window-buffer-height'.
8541 - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
8543 Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
8544 The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
8545 lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
8547 Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
8550 If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument
8551 COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
8553 The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
8554 obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
8555 on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
8557 Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
8558 buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
8559 possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
8560 is currently displayed in some window.
8562 ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
8563 argument function's results.
8565 ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
8566 signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. Also,
8567 `base64-decode-string' now always returns a unibyte string (in Emacs
8568 20, it returned a multibyte string when the result was a valid multibyte
8571 ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
8572 header in the list of headers passed to it.
8574 ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
8575 ignores differences in case and text representation.
8577 ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
8578 cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
8581 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
8582 nil don't display a cursor
8583 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
8584 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
8585 others display a box cursor.
8587 ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
8588 an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
8589 defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
8590 set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
8592 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
8593 specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
8594 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
8595 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
8599 (string-to-syntax "()")
8602 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
8605 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
8606 INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
8613 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
8618 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
8623 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
8630 ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
8631 the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
8634 ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
8635 a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
8636 value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
8637 not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
8639 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
8641 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
8642 for a regexp in a string.
8644 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
8645 `mouse-position-function'.
8647 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
8648 that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
8650 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
8651 Keywords are now always considered constants.
8653 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
8656 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
8657 returned by function `recent-keys'.
8659 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
8660 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
8661 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding C-M-a
8662 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
8665 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
8666 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
8668 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
8669 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
8670 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
8671 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
8674 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
8675 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
8676 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
8677 then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
8679 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
8680 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
8681 and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
8683 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
8684 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
8687 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
8689 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
8690 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
8691 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
8694 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
8695 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8696 Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the
8697 corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
8698 Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8700 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
8701 removed since it wasn't used by anything.
8703 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
8704 instead of being optional.
8706 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
8707 modify read-only text.
8709 ** New functions and variables for locales.
8711 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
8712 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
8713 time functions like strftime. The new variables
8714 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
8715 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
8717 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
8718 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
8719 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
8720 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
8721 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
8722 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
8723 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
8725 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
8726 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
8727 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
8730 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
8731 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
8733 ** New function `propertize'
8735 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
8736 strings with text properties.
8738 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
8740 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
8741 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
8742 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
8743 specified value of that property. Example:
8745 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
8747 ** push and pop macros.
8749 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
8750 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
8751 as the place that holds the list to be changed.
8753 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
8754 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
8755 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
8757 ** New dolist and dotimes macros.
8759 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
8760 are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
8762 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
8763 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
8764 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
8765 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
8767 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
8768 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
8769 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
8770 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
8772 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
8773 [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
8774 class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
8777 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9
8778 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
8779 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
8780 [:blank:] matches space and tab only
8781 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
8783 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
8785 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
8786 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8787 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
8788 [:alpha:] matches letters.
8789 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8790 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
8791 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
8792 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
8793 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
8794 [:punct:] matches punctuation.
8795 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8796 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
8797 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
8798 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
8799 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
8801 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
8803 The following functions are defined for hash tables:
8805 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS
8807 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
8808 are optional. The following arguments are defined:
8812 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
8813 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
8814 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
8818 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
8819 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
8821 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
8823 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
8824 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
8825 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
8826 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
8827 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
8829 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
8831 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
8832 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
8833 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
8837 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
8838 `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
8839 `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
8840 collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
8841 outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
8843 - Function: makehash &optional TEST
8845 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
8847 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE
8849 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
8851 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
8853 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
8856 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE
8858 Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
8860 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
8862 Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
8864 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
8866 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
8868 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
8870 Returns the size of TABLE.
8872 - Function: hash-table-test TABLE
8874 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
8876 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
8878 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
8880 - Function: clrhash TABLE
8884 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
8886 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
8889 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
8891 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
8892 another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
8894 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE
8896 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
8898 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
8900 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
8901 arguments KEY and VALUE.
8903 - Function: sxhash OBJ
8905 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
8907 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
8909 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
8910 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
8911 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
8912 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
8913 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
8915 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
8917 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
8918 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
8919 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
8921 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
8922 be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
8924 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
8925 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
8927 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
8928 (sxhash (upcase a)))
8930 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
8931 'case-fold-string-hash))
8933 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
8935 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
8937 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
8938 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
8939 a cons cell which is its own cdr.
8941 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
8943 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
8944 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
8946 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
8947 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
8948 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
8949 is too short to reach that column.
8951 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
8952 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
8953 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
8954 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
8956 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
8957 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
8958 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
8960 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
8961 to specify which buffer to return the size of.
8963 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
8964 calendar-move-hook after moving point.
8966 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
8967 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
8968 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
8969 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
8970 temporary-file-directory instead.
8972 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
8973 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
8974 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
8975 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
8977 ** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
8978 elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value.
8980 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
8982 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
8983 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
8984 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
8986 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
8988 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
8989 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
8990 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
8991 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
8992 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
8993 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
8995 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
8996 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
8997 to get an error if the file exists at that time.
8998 The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
9000 ** Function `format' now handles text properties.
9002 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
9003 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
9004 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
9007 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
9008 string where arguments appear in the result string.
9012 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
9014 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
9015 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
9018 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
9020 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
9022 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
9023 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
9026 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
9028 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
9029 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
9034 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
9035 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
9037 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
9038 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
9039 to enable sound support.
9041 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
9042 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
9043 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
9044 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
9045 sound to play, before playing the sound.
9047 The following sound properties are supported:
9051 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
9052 searched relative to `data-directory'.
9056 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
9057 may be present, but not both.
9061 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
9062 0..1. This property is optional.
9066 DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
9067 sound. The default device is system-dependent.
9069 Other properties are ignored.
9071 An alternative interface is called as
9072 (play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
9074 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
9076 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
9079 ** Changes to garbage collection
9081 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
9082 of live and free strings.
9084 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
9085 strings that have been consed so far.
9088 * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
9091 ** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
9094 ** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional
9095 argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is
9096 returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil.
9098 ** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
9100 ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
9102 ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
9105 - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
9107 Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
9109 SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
9110 measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
9111 character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
9112 font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
9113 FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
9115 ** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
9118 - Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
9120 Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
9121 FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
9122 or omitted means use the selected frame.
9124 ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
9125 satisfying one of a list of specifications.
9127 ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
9130 ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
9134 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
9136 ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
9137 to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
9139 Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
9140 text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
9141 is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
9142 your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
9143 laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
9144 just display it black instead.
9146 This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
9149 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
9153 ** New face implementation.
9155 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
9156 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
9160 Each face can specify the following display attributes:
9162 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
9164 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
9165 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
9167 3. Font height in 1/10pt
9169 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
9171 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
9173 6. Foreground color.
9175 7. Background color.
9177 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
9179 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
9181 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
9183 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
9185 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
9188 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
9189 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
9191 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
9192 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
9193 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
9194 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
9195 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face
9196 attributes mentioned above.
9198 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
9199 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
9202 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
9203 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
9208 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
9209 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
9210 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
9211 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
9212 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
9213 results in a fully-specified face.
9215 *** Face realization.
9217 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
9218 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
9219 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
9220 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
9221 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
9222 cache of the frame on which it was realized.
9224 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
9225 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
9226 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
9227 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
9229 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
9230 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
9231 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
9232 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
9233 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
9235 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
9236 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
9237 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
9238 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
9239 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
9242 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
9243 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
9244 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
9245 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
9247 **** Clearing face caches.
9249 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
9250 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
9255 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
9256 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
9257 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
9259 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
9260 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
9261 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
9262 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
9263 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
9265 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
9266 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
9267 match for the given face attributes in this font list.
9269 Font selection can be influenced by the user.
9271 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
9272 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
9273 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
9274 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
9275 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
9276 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
9277 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
9279 Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
9280 alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
9283 Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify
9284 all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a
9287 Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are
9290 Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts.
9295 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
9296 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
9299 To enable scalable font use, set the variable
9300 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
9301 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
9302 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
9303 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
9306 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
9308 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
9310 *** Functions and variables related to font selection.
9312 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
9314 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
9315 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
9316 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
9318 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
9319 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
9320 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
9321 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
9322 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
9323 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
9324 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
9325 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
9326 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
9327 of the face font sort order.
9329 - Function: x-font-family-list
9331 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
9332 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
9333 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
9334 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
9336 - Variable: font-list-limit
9338 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
9339 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
9340 matching font. The default is currently 100.
9342 *** Setting face attributes.
9344 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
9345 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
9346 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
9349 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
9350 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
9352 The following attributes are recognized:
9356 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
9357 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
9358 and `?' are allowed.
9362 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
9363 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
9364 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
9365 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
9369 VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
9370 in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
9371 scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
9372 height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
9376 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
9377 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
9378 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
9382 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
9383 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
9386 `:foreground', `:background'
9388 VALUE must be a color name, a string.
9392 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
9393 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
9394 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
9399 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
9400 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
9401 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
9406 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
9407 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
9408 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
9409 is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
9413 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
9414 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
9415 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
9416 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
9417 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
9418 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
9419 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
9420 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
9421 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
9422 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
9423 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
9424 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
9425 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
9426 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
9427 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
9428 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
9433 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
9434 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
9438 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
9439 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
9440 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
9441 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
9442 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
9443 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
9445 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
9446 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
9450 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
9451 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
9452 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
9455 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
9456 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
9457 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
9459 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
9464 VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
9465 of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
9466 like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
9468 *** Face attributes and X resources
9470 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
9473 Face attribute X resource class
9474 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
9475 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
9476 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
9477 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
9478 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
9479 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
9480 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
9481 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
9482 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
9483 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
9484 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
9485 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
9486 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
9487 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
9488 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
9489 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
9490 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
9491 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
9492 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
9493 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
9495 *** Text property `face'.
9497 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
9498 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
9499 specification can be
9501 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
9503 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
9504 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
9505 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
9506 for face attribute names.
9508 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
9509 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
9510 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
9512 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
9514 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
9515 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
9516 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
9517 default. You can get defined colors with a call to
9518 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
9519 used to clear the mapping table.
9521 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
9523 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
9524 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
9525 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
9526 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
9527 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
9528 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
9529 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
9530 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
9531 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
9532 modify their color-related behavior.
9534 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
9537 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
9539 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
9540 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
9541 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
9542 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
9543 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
9544 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
9545 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
9546 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
9547 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
9549 The new function `display-images-p' returns non-nil if a particular
9550 display can display image files.
9552 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
9554 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
9555 To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
9556 the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
9557 `Inviolable' option.
9559 The function `minibuffer-prompt-end' returns the current position of the
9560 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
9561 Otherwise, it returns `(point-min)'.
9563 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
9565 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
9566 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
9567 property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
9569 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
9570 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9571 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
9572 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
9573 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
9574 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
9575 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
9578 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9579 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
9580 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
9582 The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
9584 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9586 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
9588 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9589 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
9590 constrained position if that is different.
9592 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
9593 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
9594 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
9595 constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9596 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
9597 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
9598 fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
9599 the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
9600 also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9602 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
9603 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
9604 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
9605 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
9606 only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
9608 If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
9609 a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
9611 Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
9613 - Function: delete-field &optional POS
9615 Delete the field surrounding POS.
9616 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9617 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9619 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
9621 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
9622 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9623 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9624 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9625 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
9627 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
9629 Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
9630 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9631 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9632 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9633 then the end of the *following* field is returned.
9635 - Function: field-string &optional POS
9637 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
9638 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9639 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9641 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
9643 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
9644 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9645 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9649 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
9650 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
9651 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
9652 replaces the display of the characters having that property.
9654 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
9655 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
9656 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
9657 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
9660 IMAGE is an image specification.
9662 *** Image specifications
9664 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
9665 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
9666 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
9667 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
9668 described below are ignored.
9670 The following is a list of properties all image types share.
9674 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
9675 If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
9676 to use for its ascent.
9678 If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
9679 image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
9681 If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
9682 centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
9683 of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
9684 overlays that apply to the image.
9688 MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put
9689 as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the
9690 horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0.
9694 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
9699 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
9701 ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
9702 edge-detection algorithm to the image.
9704 ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
9705 apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
9706 nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
9707 position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
9708 around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
9709 neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
9710 transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
9711 x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
9714 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
9716 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
9718 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
9719 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
9720 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
9721 of the factors' absolute values.
9723 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
9729 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
9735 ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
9740 If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
9741 the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
9742 image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
9743 background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
9744 image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is
9745 the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
9746 GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
9749 If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
9750 in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
9755 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
9756 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
9757 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
9758 may be present in the image specification.
9762 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
9763 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
9764 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
9765 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
9767 *** Supported image types
9769 **** XBM, image type `xbm'.
9771 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
9772 properties supported are:
9776 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
9777 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color.
9781 BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil
9782 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
9784 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
9785 case, the image specification must contain the following properties
9786 instead of a `:file' property.
9790 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
9794 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
9800 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
9801 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
9803 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
9805 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
9808 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
9809 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
9812 **** XPM, image type `xpm'
9814 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
9815 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
9816 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
9817 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
9819 Additional image properties supported are:
9821 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
9823 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
9824 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
9827 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
9828 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
9830 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
9831 to display compressed images.
9833 **** PBM, image type `pbm'
9835 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
9836 mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
9841 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
9842 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color.
9846 BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil
9847 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
9849 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
9851 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
9852 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
9855 **** TIFF, image type `tiff'
9857 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
9858 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
9861 **** GIF, image type `gif'
9863 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
9864 `libungif-4.1.0', or later.
9866 Additional image properties supported are:
9870 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
9871 multi-image GIF file. If INDEX is too large, the image displays
9874 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
9875 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
9876 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
9879 (defun show-anim (file max)
9880 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
9881 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
9883 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
9886 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
9889 (goto-char (point-min))
9890 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
9891 (insert-image img "x"))
9892 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
9894 **** PNG, image type `png'
9896 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
9897 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
9900 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
9902 Additional image properties supported are:
9906 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
9907 integer. This is a required property.
9911 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
9912 must be a integer. This is an required property.
9916 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
9917 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
9918 files. This is an required property.
9920 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
9925 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
9926 which are supported in the current configuration.
9928 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
9929 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
9930 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
9931 manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
9932 images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
9934 *** Simplified image API, image.el
9936 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
9937 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
9938 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
9939 define an image based on available image types. The functions
9940 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
9945 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
9948 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
9949 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
9950 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
9951 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
9952 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
9953 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
9954 of the display margins.
9956 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
9957 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
9958 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
9959 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
9964 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
9965 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
9966 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
9967 that have a `help-echo' property.
9969 If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
9970 is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
9971 the window in which the help was found.
9973 If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
9974 `help-echo' text property was found.
9976 If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
9977 POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
9979 If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
9980 the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
9983 If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
9984 string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
9986 For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
9987 determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
9988 property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
9989 For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
9990 used as help string.
9992 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
9993 the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
9994 causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
9996 ** Vertical fractional scrolling.
9998 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
9999 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
10001 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
10002 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
10003 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
10004 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
10007 (global-set-key [A-down]
10010 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
10011 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
10012 (global-set-key [A-up]
10015 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
10016 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
10018 ** New hook `fontification-functions'.
10020 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
10021 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
10022 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
10023 is called with one argument, POS.
10025 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
10026 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
10027 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
10028 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
10029 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
10031 ** Tool bar support.
10033 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
10034 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
10035 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
10036 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
10037 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
10038 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
10040 *** Tool bar item definitions
10042 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
10043 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
10044 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
10046 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
10047 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
10048 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
10049 property (see below).
10051 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
10052 binding are currently ignored.
10054 The following properties are recognized:
10058 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
10063 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
10067 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
10068 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
10069 used instead of BINDING to display this item.
10071 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
10073 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
10074 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
10078 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
10079 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
10080 meaning of each of the four elements:
10082 Index Use when item is
10083 ----------------------------------------
10084 0 enabled and selected
10085 1 enabled and deselected
10086 2 disabled and selected
10087 3 disabled and deselected
10089 If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
10090 algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
10092 `:help HELP-STRING'.
10094 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
10095 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
10097 The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
10098 toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
10099 to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
10102 The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
10103 dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
10104 buffer-locally to override the global map.
10106 *** Tool-bar-related variables.
10108 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
10109 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
10110 than 1/4 of the frame's size.
10112 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
10113 raised when the mouse moves over them.
10115 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
10116 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
10117 pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and
10118 vertical margins . Default is 1.
10120 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
10121 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
10123 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
10125 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
10126 a tool bar item. If
10128 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
10129 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
10130 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
10132 is the original tool bar item definition, then
10134 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
10136 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
10139 ** Mode line changes.
10141 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
10143 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
10144 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
10145 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
10147 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
10148 a `local-map' text property.
10150 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
10151 that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
10153 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
10154 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
10155 `local-map' property.
10157 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
10158 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
10161 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
10162 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
10164 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
10165 variable mode-line-format to nil.
10167 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
10169 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
10170 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
10171 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
10172 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
10175 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
10178 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
10179 position in the header-line.
10181 ** Text property `display'
10183 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
10184 replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
10185 also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
10186 the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
10187 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
10189 *** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
10191 To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
10192 text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
10194 If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
10195 marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
10196 the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
10197 is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
10198 simpler form STRING as property value.
10200 *** Variable width and height spaces
10202 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
10203 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
10204 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
10205 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
10206 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
10207 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
10208 simpler form STRETCH as property value.
10210 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
10211 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
10212 properties described below.
10214 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
10215 characters having the `display' property.
10219 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
10220 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
10222 - :relative-width FACTOR
10224 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
10225 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
10226 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
10227 width of that character by FACTOR.
10231 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
10232 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
10234 Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
10238 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
10239 normal line height.
10241 - :relative-height FACTOR
10243 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
10244 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
10248 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
10249 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
10250 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
10253 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
10257 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
10258 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
10259 in the display, the characters having this display specification in
10260 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
10261 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
10262 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
10263 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
10264 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
10265 as display specification.
10267 *** Other display properties
10269 - (space-width FACTOR)
10271 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
10272 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
10277 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
10279 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
10280 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
10281 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
10282 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
10283 a font is available counts as a step.
10285 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
10286 as tall as the frame's default font.
10288 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
10289 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
10291 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
10292 `height' bound to the current specified font height.
10296 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
10297 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
10298 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
10299 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
10300 `height' subproperty.
10302 *** Conditional display properties
10304 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
10305 has the form `(when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC applies
10306 only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. During the
10307 evaluation, `object' is bound to the string or buffer having the
10308 conditional display property; `position' and `buffer-position' are
10309 bound to the position within `object' and the buffer position where
10310 the display property was found, respectively. Both positions can be
10311 different when object is a string.
10313 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
10316 ** New menu separator types.
10318 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
10319 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
10320 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
10321 to specify other menu separator types.
10323 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
10325 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
10328 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
10330 A single line in the menu's foreground color.
10332 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
10334 A double line in the menu's foreground color.
10336 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
10338 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
10340 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
10342 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
10344 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
10346 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form
10347 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
10349 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
10351 A single line with 3D raised appearance.
10353 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
10355 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
10357 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
10359 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
10361 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
10363 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
10365 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
10367 Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
10369 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
10371 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
10373 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
10375 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
10377 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
10378 the corresponding single-line separators.
10380 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
10382 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
10383 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
10384 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
10385 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
10386 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
10387 default background is the background color of the frame, and the
10388 default foreground is black.
10390 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
10391 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
10392 `ScrollBarBackground').
10394 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
10395 settings for scroll bar colors.
10397 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
10398 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
10400 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
10401 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
10402 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
10403 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
10404 the original window start.
10406 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
10407 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
10408 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
10410 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
10412 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
10413 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
10414 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
10415 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
10417 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
10418 fixed-width and fixed-height.
10420 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
10422 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
10423 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
10424 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
10425 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
10426 temporarily to nil, for example
10428 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
10429 (enlarge-window 10))
10431 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
10432 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
10434 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
10435 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
10436 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
10437 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
10438 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
10439 support a vertical-bar cursor).
10443 * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
10445 ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
10448 ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
10450 ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
10452 ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
10453 only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
10454 exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
10455 (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
10456 (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
10458 ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
10462 * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
10464 ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
10468 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
10470 ** Not new, but not mentioned before:
10471 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
10473 * Changes in Emacs 20.4
10475 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
10477 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
10478 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
10479 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
10481 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
10482 is the one that is used.
10484 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
10485 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
10486 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
10487 separate from the command's regular output.
10488 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
10489 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
10490 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
10493 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
10494 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
10495 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
10496 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
10498 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
10499 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
10500 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
10501 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
10503 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
10504 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
10505 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
10506 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
10508 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
10509 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
10510 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
10511 they never ignore case.
10513 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
10514 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
10515 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
10516 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
10517 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
10518 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
10519 part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
10521 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
10522 the same format that was used in the file before.
10524 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
10525 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
10527 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
10528 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
10529 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
10531 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
10532 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
10533 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
10534 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
10535 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
10536 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
10537 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
10539 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
10540 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
10541 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
10542 format. You can now customize these variables.
10544 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
10545 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
10546 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
10547 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
10549 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
10550 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
10551 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
10553 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
10554 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
10555 doesn't have any effect.
10557 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
10558 not one per buffer.
10560 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
10561 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
10562 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
10564 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
10565 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
10566 `auto-show-mode' command.
10568 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
10569 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
10570 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
10571 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
10572 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
10574 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
10575 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
10577 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
10578 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
10579 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
10581 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
10582 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
10583 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
10584 and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
10586 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
10588 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
10589 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
10590 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
10591 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
10592 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
10594 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
10595 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
10597 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
10598 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
10599 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
10600 `?' on other systems.
10602 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
10603 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
10606 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
10607 current codepage when it starts.
10611 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
10612 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
10613 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
10614 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
10615 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
10616 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
10620 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
10621 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
10623 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
10624 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
10625 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
10626 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
10627 buffer-file-coding-system.
10629 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
10630 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
10633 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
10634 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
10635 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
10636 list of possible coding systems.
10640 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
10641 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
10642 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
10643 docstring for details.
10645 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
10646 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
10647 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
10648 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
10649 lineup functions use this feature currently.
10651 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
10652 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
10654 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
10655 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
10657 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
10658 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
10659 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
10660 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
10663 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
10664 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
10666 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
10667 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
10668 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
10669 function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
10671 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
10672 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
10673 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
10674 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
10675 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
10677 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
10679 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
10681 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
10682 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
10684 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
10686 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
10687 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
10688 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
10689 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
10690 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
10694 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
10695 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
10696 Gnus manual for the full story.
10698 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
10699 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
10700 group, which is created automatically.
10702 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
10705 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
10707 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
10708 outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
10710 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
10713 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
10715 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
10716 re-highlighting of the article buffer.
10718 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
10720 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
10721 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
10723 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
10724 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
10726 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
10727 control over simplification.
10729 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
10731 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
10734 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
10736 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
10738 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
10739 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
10740 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
10742 *** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
10743 `a' forces normal posting method.
10745 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
10748 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
10749 to a non-nil value.
10751 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
10752 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
10754 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
10757 *** A history of where mails have been split is available.
10759 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
10761 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
10762 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
10764 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
10765 `message-cite-original-without-signature'.
10767 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
10769 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
10772 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
10773 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
10775 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
10776 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
10778 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
10780 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
10782 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
10784 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
10786 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
10787 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
10788 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
10790 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
10791 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
10792 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
10793 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
10794 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
10796 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
10797 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
10798 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
10799 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
10801 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
10802 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
10803 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
10806 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
10808 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
10809 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
10811 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
10812 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
10813 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
10814 removed from the label.
10816 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
10817 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
10819 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
10820 customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
10822 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
10823 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
10826 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
10828 ** New/deleted modes and packages
10830 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
10831 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
10833 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
10834 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
10835 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
10837 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
10838 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
10839 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
10841 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
10843 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
10844 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
10845 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
10846 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
10847 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
10849 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
10850 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
10851 distribution when the config.bat script is run.
10853 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
10854 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
10855 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
10856 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
10857 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
10858 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
10859 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
10860 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
10861 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
10863 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
10864 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
10865 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
10866 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
10867 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
10870 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
10871 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
10872 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
10873 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
10874 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
10875 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
10877 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
10878 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
10879 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
10880 was not documented clearly before.
10882 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
10883 This includes Tetris and Snake.
10885 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
10887 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
10888 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
10889 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
10890 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
10892 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
10893 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
10894 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
10896 ** Changes in the file-attributes function.
10898 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
10899 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
10901 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
10902 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
10905 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
10906 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
10907 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
10908 file names and attributes are returned.
10910 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
10911 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
10912 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes.
10913 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
10914 returns the result.
10916 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
10917 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
10919 ** New functions for base64 conversion:
10921 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
10922 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
10923 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
10926 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
10927 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
10930 The new function process-running-child-p
10931 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
10932 terminal to its own child process.
10934 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
10935 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
10936 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
10937 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
10939 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
10940 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
10942 ** easymenu.el now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
10943 :included is an alias for :visible.
10945 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
10946 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
10947 to move or copy menu entries.
10949 ** Multibyte editing changes
10951 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
10952 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
10953 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
10954 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
10955 char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
10956 (setq char (sref str idx)
10957 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
10958 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
10960 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
10961 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
10962 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
10964 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
10965 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
10966 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
10968 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited
10970 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
10971 across the boundary.
10973 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
10974 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
10975 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
10976 contains 8-bit characters.
10977 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
10978 contains invalid characters.
10980 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
10981 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
10982 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
10983 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
10986 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
10987 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
10988 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
10989 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
10991 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
10992 compose Thai characters in a string.
10994 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
10995 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
10996 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
10997 menus should always use the third argument.
10999 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
11000 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
11001 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
11002 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
11004 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
11005 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
11006 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
11007 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
11009 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
11010 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
11011 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
11012 echo area contents.
11014 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
11016 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
11017 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
11018 requested feature cannot be loaded.
11020 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
11021 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
11022 means to clear out that attribute.
11024 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
11025 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
11027 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
11028 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
11029 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
11030 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
11032 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
11033 the gap of the current buffer.
11035 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
11036 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
11039 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
11040 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
11041 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
11042 it back in after any modifications have been made.
11044 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
11046 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
11047 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
11048 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
11049 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
11050 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
11052 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
11053 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
11054 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
11055 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
11056 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
11058 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
11059 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
11060 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
11062 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
11063 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
11064 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
11065 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
11066 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
11069 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
11070 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
11071 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
11072 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
11074 * Changes in Emacs 20.3
11076 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
11077 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
11078 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
11079 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
11081 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
11082 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
11083 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
11084 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
11085 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
11086 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
11087 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
11090 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
11093 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
11094 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
11095 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
11096 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
11097 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
11099 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
11100 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
11101 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
11102 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
11104 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
11105 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
11106 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
11107 something that most users not do.
11109 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
11110 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
11111 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
11114 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
11115 pasting operations.
11117 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
11118 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
11119 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
11120 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
11123 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
11124 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
11125 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
11126 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
11127 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
11130 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
11131 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
11132 to be confused by TeX commands.
11134 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
11135 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
11136 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
11137 of various alternative replacements and actions.
11139 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
11140 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
11141 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
11142 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
11143 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
11145 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
11146 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
11148 ** Changes in input method usage.
11150 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
11151 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
11154 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
11156 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
11157 of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
11159 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
11160 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
11162 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
11164 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
11166 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
11167 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
11169 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
11170 given in the following case:
11171 o When you are using a complex input method.
11172 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
11174 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
11175 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
11176 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
11177 setting it to t is helpful.
11179 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
11181 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
11183 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
11184 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
11185 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
11186 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
11189 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
11190 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
11191 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
11194 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
11196 which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
11198 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
11199 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
11201 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
11202 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
11203 its owner and group.
11205 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
11206 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
11208 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
11209 contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
11211 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
11212 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
11213 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
11214 by the left edge of the rectangle.
11216 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
11217 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
11218 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
11219 for writing keyboard macros.
11221 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
11222 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
11223 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
11224 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
11225 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
11228 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
11230 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
11231 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
11234 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
11235 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
11236 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
11237 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
11239 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
11240 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
11241 literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
11243 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
11244 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
11245 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
11246 inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
11248 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
11249 failure if the command produces no output.
11251 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
11252 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
11255 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
11256 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
11257 function and variable names.
11259 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
11260 reading specific files. This has higher priority than
11261 file-coding-system-alist.
11263 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
11264 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
11265 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
11266 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
11267 according to the current fontset.
11269 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
11271 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
11272 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
11273 nonascii-insert-offset.
11275 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
11276 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
11277 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
11278 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
11280 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
11281 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
11283 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
11284 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
11286 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
11287 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
11290 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
11291 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
11293 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
11294 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
11295 all variables that have documentation.
11297 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
11298 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
11299 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
11300 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
11301 it should show; the default is 20.
11303 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
11304 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
11307 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
11308 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
11309 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
11310 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
11311 the customizable options which were changed since that version.
11312 Newly added options are included as well.
11314 If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
11315 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
11316 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
11318 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
11321 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
11322 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
11324 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
11325 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
11328 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
11329 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
11332 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
11333 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
11334 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
11335 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
11338 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
11340 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
11341 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
11342 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
11344 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
11345 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
11346 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
11351 *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
11352 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
11354 *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
11355 and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
11357 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
11358 read and post multi-lingual articles.
11360 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
11361 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
11362 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
11363 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
11364 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
11365 made invisible again.
11367 ** Mail reading and sending changes
11369 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
11370 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
11371 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
11374 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
11375 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
11376 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
11377 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
11378 rmail-default-body-file.
11380 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
11381 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
11382 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
11384 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
11385 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
11386 is evaluated to insert the signature.
11388 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
11389 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
11390 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
11391 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
11392 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
11393 especially interested in trying feedmail.
11395 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
11396 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
11397 provided by feedmail are:
11399 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
11400 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
11401 there is also a queue for draft messages
11403 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
11404 be prompted for confirmation
11406 **** does smart filling of address headers
11408 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
11409 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
11410 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
11412 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
11413 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
11414 /usr/lib/sendmail, and Emacs Lisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
11415 function for something else (10-20 lines of Lisp code).
11419 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
11420 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
11422 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
11423 run Dired on the directory name at point.
11425 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
11426 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
11427 for a specified regexp.
11431 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
11434 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
11435 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
11438 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
11439 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
11440 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
11441 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
11443 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
11444 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
11445 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
11446 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
11447 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
11449 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
11450 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
11451 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
11452 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
11453 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
11455 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
11456 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
11457 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
11458 `* l', to mark all files currently locked.
11460 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
11461 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
11462 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
11464 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
11465 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
11466 session to resolve them.
11468 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
11469 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
11470 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
11473 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
11474 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
11475 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
11476 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
11477 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
11478 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
11481 ** Changes in Font Lock
11483 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
11484 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
11485 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
11486 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
11487 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
11489 ** Frame name display changes
11491 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
11492 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
11493 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
11494 when many frames are invisible or iconified.
11496 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
11497 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
11500 ** Comint (subshell) changes
11502 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
11503 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
11504 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
11506 *** There are new commands in Comint mode.
11508 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
11509 that is, the line after the last line you got.
11510 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
11512 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
11513 send the current line together with the following line, when you send
11514 the following line.
11516 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
11517 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
11518 previously sent input.
11520 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
11521 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
11522 as the search string.
11524 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
11525 automatically in compilation-mode windows.
11529 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
11530 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
11531 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
11534 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
11535 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
11536 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
11537 style is still the default however.
11539 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
11541 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
11542 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
11543 them. They do not have key bindings by default.
11545 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
11546 and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
11548 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
11549 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
11551 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
11552 makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
11554 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
11555 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
11557 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
11558 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
11559 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
11560 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
11562 ** Changes to hippie-expand.
11564 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
11565 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
11566 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
11568 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
11569 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
11570 expanding dynamically.
11572 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
11573 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
11575 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
11576 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
11577 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
11578 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
11580 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
11582 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
11584 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
11585 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
11586 automatic key generation. This replaces variable
11587 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
11588 against the first word in the title.
11590 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
11591 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
11592 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
11593 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
11594 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
11595 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
11597 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
11598 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
11599 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
11600 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
11602 ** Changes in vcursor.el.
11604 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
11605 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
11606 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
11607 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
11608 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
11609 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
11611 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
11612 Editing group once the package is loaded.
11614 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
11615 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
11616 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior.
11618 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
11619 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
11623 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
11624 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
11625 are identified by syntax tables in effect.
11627 *** Generic region skipping implemented.
11628 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
11629 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
11630 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
11633 o URLs are automatically skipped
11634 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
11636 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
11638 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
11640 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
11641 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
11642 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
11643 section `Optimizations' in the manual.
11645 *** New recursive parser.
11647 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
11648 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
11649 recursive parser scans the individual files.
11651 *** Parsing only part of a document.
11653 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
11654 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
11655 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
11657 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
11659 *** Storing parsing information in a file.
11661 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
11663 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
11665 *** Using multiple selection buffers
11667 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
11668 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
11670 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
11672 *** References to external documents.
11674 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
11675 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
11676 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
11677 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
11678 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
11679 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
11680 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
11682 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
11684 The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
11685 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
11687 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
11688 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
11690 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
11692 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
11693 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
11695 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
11697 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
11698 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
11699 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
11700 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
11701 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
11702 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
11705 *** Support for the varioref package
11707 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
11711 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
11712 and citations are created. These hooks are
11713 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
11714 `reftex-format-cite-function'.
11716 *** Citations outside LaTeX
11718 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
11719 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
11721 *** Short context is no longer fontified.
11723 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
11724 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
11727 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
11729 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
11730 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
11731 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
11732 directories that contain the same file name.
11734 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
11735 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
11736 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
11737 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
11738 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
11739 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
11740 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
11743 ** New modes and packages
11745 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
11746 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
11747 it, but some do not.
11749 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
11752 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
11753 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
11754 around in a buffer.
11756 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
11758 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
11759 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
11760 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
11761 established system of notation similar to Chess.
11763 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
11764 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
11765 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
11767 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
11768 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
11769 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc.); others are implementations of
11770 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
11771 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
11774 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
11775 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
11777 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
11778 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
11779 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
11780 the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
11782 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
11784 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
11785 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
11786 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
11787 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
11788 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc.)
11789 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
11790 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
11791 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
11792 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
11793 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
11794 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
11796 Platform-specific modes:
11798 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
11799 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
11800 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
11801 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
11802 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
11803 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
11804 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
11805 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
11806 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
11808 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
11810 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
11811 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
11812 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
11813 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
11815 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
11816 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
11817 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
11819 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
11820 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
11821 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
11822 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
11824 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
11825 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
11826 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
11829 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
11830 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
11831 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
11832 current input method for reading this one event.
11834 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
11835 now control whether to output certain characters as
11836 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
11837 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
11838 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
11839 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
11841 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
11843 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
11844 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
11846 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
11847 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
11848 always increases point by 1.
11850 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
11851 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
11853 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
11855 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
11856 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
11857 default value changed. For example,
11859 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
11864 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
11867 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
11868 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
11869 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
11870 `:version' in the top level group.
11872 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
11874 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
11875 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
11877 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
11878 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
11879 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
11882 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
11883 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
11886 ** There is a new debugger command, R.
11887 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
11888 in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
11890 ** Frame-local variables.
11892 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
11893 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
11894 local bindings for that variable.
11896 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
11897 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
11898 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
11901 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
11902 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
11903 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
11904 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
11906 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
11907 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
11908 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
11909 through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
11911 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
11912 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
11913 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
11914 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
11915 See the documentation in sregex.el.
11917 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
11918 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
11919 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
11920 The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
11922 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
11923 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
11925 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
11926 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
11927 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
11929 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
11930 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
11931 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
11932 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
11934 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
11935 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
11938 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
11939 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
11940 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
11941 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
11942 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
11944 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
11945 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
11946 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
11947 default password to use if the user enters nothing.
11949 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
11950 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
11951 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
11952 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
11953 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
11955 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
11956 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
11957 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
11958 end of the window, even if this requires computation.
11960 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
11961 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
11962 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
11964 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
11965 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
11966 was directed to display this buffer.
11968 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
11969 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
11970 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
11971 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
11972 set-window-configuration.
11974 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
11975 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
11976 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
11977 windows and the choice of buffers to display.
11979 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
11980 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
11981 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
11983 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
11984 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
11985 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
11987 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
11988 and it is meant to be set by major modes.
11990 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
11991 except that it discards all text properties from the result.
11993 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
11994 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
11995 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
11997 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
11998 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
11999 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
12000 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
12004 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
12005 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
12008 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
12009 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
12010 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
12011 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
12012 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
12014 *** A new format for menu items is supported.
12016 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
12017 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
12018 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
12019 starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
12022 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
12023 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
12024 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
12025 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
12026 The supported properties include
12028 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
12030 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
12031 item should appear in the menu.
12033 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
12034 which will be REAL-BINDING.
12035 It should return a binding to use instead.
12037 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
12038 binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
12039 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
12040 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
12041 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
12044 This means that the command normally has no
12045 keyboard equivalent.
12046 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
12047 :button (TYPE . SELECTED)
12048 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
12049 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
12050 value says whether this button is currently selected.
12052 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
12053 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
12055 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
12059 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
12060 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
12061 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
12062 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
12064 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
12066 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
12067 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
12068 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
12069 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
12070 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
12071 forward, away from the user.
12073 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
12075 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
12076 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
12077 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
12078 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
12079 loaded into Emacs. The format is:
12081 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
12083 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
12084 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
12085 that were dragged and dropped.
12087 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
12089 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
12091 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
12092 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
12093 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
12095 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
12096 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
12097 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
12099 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
12100 in Emacs 19 and before.
12102 The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
12103 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
12105 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
12106 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
12107 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
12108 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
12110 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
12111 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
12112 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
12113 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
12114 will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
12116 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
12117 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
12118 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
12119 consistent with the new representation.
12121 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
12122 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
12123 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
12124 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
12126 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
12127 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
12128 using the table nonascii-translation-table.
12130 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
12131 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
12132 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
12134 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
12135 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
12136 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
12138 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
12139 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
12141 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
12142 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
12144 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
12145 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
12146 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
12147 You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
12149 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
12150 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
12152 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
12153 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
12154 buffer or string being searched.
12156 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
12157 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
12158 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
12159 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
12160 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
12161 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
12162 expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
12164 *** Structure of coding system changed.
12166 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
12167 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
12168 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
12169 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
12170 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
12171 your own alias name of a coding system by the function
12172 define-coding-system-alias.
12174 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
12175 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
12176 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
12177 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
12178 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
12179 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
12180 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
12183 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
12184 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
12185 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
12186 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
12188 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
12189 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
12190 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
12191 the other character sets and read it back correctly.
12193 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
12194 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
12195 This function requires a user interaction.
12197 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
12198 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
12199 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
12200 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
12201 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
12202 select-safe-coding-system.
12204 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
12205 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
12206 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
12209 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
12210 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
12211 coding systems used by some specific language environment.
12213 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
12214 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
12215 characters are found, they now return a list of single element
12216 `undecided' or its subsidiaries.
12218 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
12219 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
12220 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
12223 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
12224 coding system for communicating with other X clients.
12226 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
12227 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
12228 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
12229 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
12230 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
12231 range of characters.
12233 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
12234 Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
12236 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
12237 in the current buffer at position POS.
12239 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
12240 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
12241 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
12242 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
12243 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
12244 binding input-method-function to nil.
12246 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
12247 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
12248 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
12249 the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
12250 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
12252 The input method function is not called when reading the second and
12253 subsequent events of a key sequence.
12255 *** You can customize any language environment by using
12256 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
12258 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
12259 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
12260 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
12261 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
12262 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
12264 * Changes in Emacs 20.1
12266 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
12267 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
12268 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
12271 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
12272 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
12274 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
12275 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
12276 in your .emacs file.)
12278 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
12279 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
12281 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
12282 This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
12284 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
12285 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
12288 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
12289 delete the character before point, as usual.
12291 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
12292 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
12293 by setting search-highlight to nil.)
12295 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
12296 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
12297 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
12298 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
12299 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
12302 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
12303 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
12304 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
12305 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
12306 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
12308 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
12309 and is an alias for it.
12311 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
12312 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
12314 ** Scrolling changes
12316 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
12317 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
12319 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
12320 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
12323 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
12324 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
12325 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
12326 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
12328 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
12329 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
12330 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
12331 recenters the window.
12333 ** International character set support (MULE)
12335 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
12336 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
12337 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
12338 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
12339 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
12340 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
12342 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
12343 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
12344 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
12345 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
12346 into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
12348 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
12349 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
12350 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
12351 language, to make it possible to type them.
12353 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
12354 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
12356 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
12357 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
12359 You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
12361 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
12363 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
12364 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
12365 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
12366 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
12367 characters for their work until they want to change.
12371 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
12372 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
12373 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
12374 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
12375 support several input methods.
12377 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
12378 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
12381 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
12382 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
12383 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
12384 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
12385 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
12388 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
12389 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
12390 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
12391 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
12392 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
12394 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
12395 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
12396 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
12397 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
12399 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
12400 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
12401 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
12402 the first guess is wrong.
12404 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
12405 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
12407 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
12408 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
12409 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
12410 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
12412 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
12413 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
12414 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
12415 translate automatically to and from either one.
12417 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
12419 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
12420 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
12421 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
12424 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
12425 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
12426 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
12427 multibyte characters in that buffer.
12429 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
12430 character conversion as well.
12432 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
12434 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
12435 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
12436 requires using many fonts.
12438 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
12439 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
12441 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
12442 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
12443 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
12444 you would use a font.
12446 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
12447 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
12448 display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
12450 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
12451 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
12454 *** Defining fontsets.
12456 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
12457 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
12458 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
12460 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
12461 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
12462 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
12463 standard fontset are created automatically.
12465 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
12466 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
12467 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
12468 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
12469 name is `fontset-startup'.
12471 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
12472 The resource value should have this form:
12473 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
12474 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
12475 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
12476 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
12477 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
12478 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
12479 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
12480 CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME
12481 should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
12483 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
12484 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
12485 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
12487 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
12488 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
12489 following resource,
12490 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
12491 the font for ASCII is generated as below:
12492 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
12493 Here is the substitution rule:
12494 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
12495 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
12496 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
12497 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
12498 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
12500 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
12501 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
12502 that function explicitly to create a fontset.
12504 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
12505 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
12506 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
12507 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
12510 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
12511 defaults for a particular choice of language.
12513 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
12514 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
12515 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
12516 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
12517 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
12518 system for new files that you create.
12520 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
12521 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
12522 whole Emacs session.
12524 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
12525 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
12526 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
12528 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
12529 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
12530 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
12531 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
12532 coding systems that Emacs supports.
12534 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
12535 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
12536 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
12537 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
12538 is used for *the immediately following command*.
12540 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
12541 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
12543 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
12544 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
12546 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
12547 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
12549 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
12550 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
12551 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
12552 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
12555 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
12556 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
12557 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
12558 translated into that character code.
12560 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
12561 various countries to support the languages of those countries.
12563 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
12565 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
12566 the coding system for keyboard input.
12568 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
12569 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
12570 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
12572 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
12574 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
12575 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
12576 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
12577 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
12578 designed to work with terminals.
12580 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
12581 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
12582 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
12583 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
12584 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
12585 in the corresponding buffer.
12587 By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
12589 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
12590 to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
12591 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
12593 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
12594 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
12595 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
12598 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
12599 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
12601 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
12602 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
12603 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
12604 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
12606 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
12607 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
12608 related information.
12610 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
12611 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
12614 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
12615 information about the support for a particular language.
12616 You specify the language as an argument.
12618 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
12619 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
12622 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
12623 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
12624 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
12625 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
12627 A alternativnyj (Russian)
12629 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
12630 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
12631 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
12632 E euc-japan (Japanese)
12633 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
12634 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
12635 K euc-korea (Korean)
12638 S shift_jis (Japanese)
12641 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
12642 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
12643 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
12644 v viqr (Vietnamese)
12647 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
12648 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
12649 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
12650 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
12652 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
12653 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
12655 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
12656 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
12657 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
12658 Rmail files themselves.
12660 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
12661 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
12663 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
12666 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
12667 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
12668 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
12669 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
12670 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
12672 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
12673 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
12674 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
12677 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
12678 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
12679 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
12680 without any conversion.
12682 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
12683 You can now specify any number of octal digits.
12684 RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
12685 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
12687 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
12688 functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
12690 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
12691 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
12693 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
12694 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
12696 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
12697 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
12698 in the buffer before point.
12700 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
12701 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
12704 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
12705 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
12707 ** File locking works with NFS now.
12709 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
12710 in the same directory as FILENAME.
12712 This means that collision detection between two different machines now
12713 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
12714 can become a bottleneck.
12716 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
12717 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
12718 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
12719 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
12720 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
12721 so useful that the change is worth while.
12723 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
12724 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
12725 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
12726 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
12728 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
12729 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
12732 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
12733 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
12734 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
12736 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
12737 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
12738 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
12740 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
12741 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
12742 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
12744 ** Changes in View mode.
12746 *** Several new commands are available in View mode.
12747 Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
12749 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
12750 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
12752 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
12755 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
12756 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
12758 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
12759 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
12760 not just the selected window.
12762 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
12763 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
12764 turns View mode on or off.
12766 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
12767 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
12768 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
12770 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
12771 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
12773 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
12774 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
12775 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
12776 which version to compare with.
12778 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
12779 blocks if a match is inside the block.
12781 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
12782 is outside the block. By customizing the variable
12783 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
12784 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
12786 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
12787 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
12788 blocks, all of them or none.
12790 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
12791 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
12792 confirmation first.
12794 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
12795 now changes the major mode according to that file name.
12796 However, the mode will not be changed if
12797 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
12798 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
12799 not suitable for ordinary files, or
12800 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
12802 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
12804 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
12805 these commands do not change the major mode.
12807 ** M-x occur changes.
12809 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
12810 it performs a case-sensitive search.
12812 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
12813 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
12814 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
12816 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
12817 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
12818 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
12819 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
12820 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
12822 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
12823 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
12824 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
12825 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
12827 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
12828 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
12829 buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
12831 ** Outline mode changes.
12833 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
12835 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
12837 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
12838 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
12839 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
12840 was already active.
12842 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
12843 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
12844 get confused by it.
12846 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
12847 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
12849 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
12851 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
12852 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
12853 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
12854 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
12856 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
12857 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
12858 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
12860 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
12861 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
12864 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
12865 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
12866 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
12867 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
12869 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
12870 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
12871 can be. The default value is 30.
12873 ** Changes in Mail mode.
12875 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
12876 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
12877 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
12878 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
12879 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
12882 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
12883 compose-mail-other-frame.
12885 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
12886 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
12887 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
12888 buffer that shows the original message.
12890 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
12891 with separator lines around the contents.
12893 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
12894 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
12895 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
12896 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
12898 *** New features in the mail-complete command.
12900 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
12901 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
12902 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
12903 Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
12905 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
12906 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
12909 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
12910 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
12913 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
12914 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
12915 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
12916 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
12918 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
12919 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
12920 be taken to be magic.
12922 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
12923 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
12924 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
12926 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
12927 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
12929 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
12930 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
12932 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
12934 new key dired.el binding old key
12935 ------- ---------------- -------
12936 * c dired-change-marks c
12938 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
12939 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
12940 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
12942 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
12943 * ? dired-unmark-all-files C-M-?
12944 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
12945 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
12946 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
12947 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
12951 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
12952 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
12953 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
12954 each time you run it.
12956 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
12957 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
12959 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
12960 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
12961 means to move in the opposite direction.
12963 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
12964 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
12966 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
12967 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
12968 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
12969 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
12974 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
12976 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
12979 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
12980 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
12982 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the
12985 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
12987 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
12989 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
12991 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
12992 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
12993 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
12995 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
12997 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
12999 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
13000 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
13002 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
13003 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
13004 used to pick articles.
13006 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
13007 another have been added.
13009 `M-x gnus-change-server'
13011 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
13012 generating lines in buffers.
13014 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
13017 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
13019 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
13021 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
13023 *** Scores can be decayed.
13025 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
13027 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
13028 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
13030 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
13033 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
13035 *** A new command for reading collections of documents
13036 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `C-M-d'.
13038 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
13040 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
13041 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
13043 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
13044 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
13046 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
13049 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
13050 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
13052 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
13054 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
13056 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
13058 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
13060 Use the `Y c' command.
13062 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
13064 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
13066 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
13068 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
13069 from incoming mail before saving the mail.
13071 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
13073 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
13075 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
13076 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
13078 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
13080 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
13081 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
13082 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
13083 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
13086 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
13087 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
13088 particular news group. This can be done by:
13090 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
13092 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
13093 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
13094 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
13095 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
13096 for reading and posting).
13098 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
13099 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
13100 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
13101 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
13104 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
13105 default. Here are some of these default settings:
13107 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
13108 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
13109 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
13110 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
13111 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
13113 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
13114 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
13116 ** CC mode changes.
13118 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
13119 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
13120 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
13121 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
13122 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
13125 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
13126 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
13127 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
13128 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
13129 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
13130 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
13132 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
13133 of the current buffer.
13135 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
13136 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
13137 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
13139 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
13140 style that the Python developers like.
13142 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
13143 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
13144 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
13146 ** VC Changes [new]
13148 *** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
13149 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
13150 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
13152 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
13153 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
13156 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
13157 RET in a buffer visiting that file.
13159 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
13160 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
13161 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
13162 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
13164 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
13165 version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
13167 ** Calendar changes.
13169 *** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or
13170 subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow
13171 you do this for the year of the selected date, or the
13172 following/previous years.
13174 *** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in
13175 the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i
13176 calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days
13177 each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The
13178 calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a
13179 supposed attribute of God.
13181 ** ps-print changes
13183 There are some new user variables and subgroups for customizing the page
13186 *** Headers & Footers (subgroup)
13188 Some printer systems print a header page and force the first page to
13189 be printed on the back of the header page when using duplex. If your
13190 printer system has this behavior, set variable
13191 `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' to t.
13193 If variable `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' is non-nil, it prints a
13194 blank page as the very first printed page. So, it behaves as if the
13195 very first character of buffer (or region) were a form feed ^L (\014).
13197 The variable `ps-spool-config' specifies who is responsible for
13198 setting duplex mode and page size. Valid values are:
13200 lpr-switches duplex and page size are configured by `ps-lpr-switches'.
13201 Don't forget to set `ps-lpr-switches' to select duplex
13202 printing for your printer.
13204 setpagedevice duplex and page size are configured by ps-print using the
13205 setpagedevice PostScript operator.
13207 nil duplex and page size are configured by ps-print *not* using
13208 the setpagedevice PostScript operator.
13210 The variable `ps-spool-tumble' specifies how the page images on
13211 opposite sides of a sheet are oriented with respect to each other. If
13212 `ps-spool-tumble' is nil, ps-print produces output suitable for
13213 bindings on the left or right. If `ps-spool-tumble' is non-nil,
13214 ps-print produces output suitable for bindings at the top or bottom.
13215 This variable takes effect only if `ps-spool-duplex' is non-nil.
13216 The default value is nil.
13218 The variable `ps-header-frame-alist' specifies a header frame
13219 properties alist. Valid frame properties are:
13221 fore-color Specify the foreground frame color.
13222 Value should be a float number between 0.0 (black
13223 color) and 1.0 (white color), or a string which is a
13224 color name, or a list of 3 float numbers which
13225 correspond to the Red Green Blue color scale, each
13226 float number between 0.0 (dark color) and 1.0 (bright
13227 color). The default is 0 ("black").
13229 back-color Specify the background frame color (similar to fore-color).
13230 The default is 0.9 ("gray90").
13232 shadow-color Specify the shadow color (similar to fore-color).
13233 The default is 0 ("black").
13235 border-color Specify the border color (similar to fore-color).
13236 The default is 0 ("black").
13238 border-width Specify the border width.
13239 The default is 0.4.
13241 Any other property is ignored.
13243 Don't change this alist directly; instead use Custom, or the
13244 `ps-value', `ps-get', `ps-put' and `ps-del' functions (see there for
13247 Ps-print can also print footers. The footer variables are:
13248 `ps-print-footer', `ps-footer-offset', `ps-print-footer-frame',
13249 `ps-footer-font-family', `ps-footer-font-size', `ps-footer-line-pad',
13250 `ps-footer-lines', `ps-left-footer', `ps-right-footer' and
13251 `ps-footer-frame-alist'. These variables are similar to those
13252 controlling headers.
13254 *** Color management (subgroup)
13256 If `ps-print-color-p' is non-nil, the buffer's text will be printed in
13259 *** Face Management (subgroup)
13261 If you need to print without worrying about face background colors,
13262 set the variable `ps-use-face-background' which specifies if face
13263 background should be used. Valid values are:
13265 t always use face background color.
13266 nil never use face background color.
13267 (face...) list of faces whose background color will be used.
13269 *** N-up printing (subgroup)
13271 The variable `ps-n-up-printing' specifies the number of pages per
13274 The variable `ps-n-up-margin' specifies the margin in points (pt)
13275 between the sheet border and the n-up printing.
13277 If variable `ps-n-up-border-p' is non-nil, a border is drawn around
13280 The variable `ps-n-up-filling' specifies how the page matrix is filled
13281 on each sheet of paper. Following are the valid values for
13282 `ps-n-up-filling' with a filling example using a 3x4 page matrix:
13284 `left-top' 1 2 3 4 `left-bottom' 9 10 11 12
13288 `right-top' 4 3 2 1 `right-bottom' 12 11 10 9
13292 `top-left' 1 4 7 10 `bottom-left' 3 6 9 12
13296 `top-right' 10 7 4 1 `bottom-right' 12 9 6 3
13300 Any other value is treated as `left-top'.
13302 *** Zebra stripes (subgroup)
13304 The variable `ps-zebra-color' controls the zebra stripes grayscale or
13307 The variable `ps-zebra-stripe-follow' specifies how zebra stripes
13308 continue on next page. Visually, valid values are (the character `+'
13309 to the right of each column indicates that a line is printed):
13311 `nil' `follow' `full' `full-follow'
13312 Current Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
13313 1 XXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXX + 1 XXXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13314 2 XXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXX + 2 XXXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13315 3 XXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXX + 3 XXXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13319 7 XXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXX + 7 XXXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13320 8 XXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXX + 8 XXXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13321 9 XXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXX + 9 XXXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13324 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
13325 Next Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
13326 12 XXXXX + 12 + 10 XXXXXX + 10 +
13327 13 XXXXX + 13 XXXXXXXX + 11 XXXXXX + 11 +
13328 14 XXXXX + 14 XXXXXXXX + 12 XXXXXX + 12 +
13329 15 + 15 XXXXXXXX + 13 + 13 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13330 16 + 16 + 14 + 14 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13331 17 + 17 + 15 + 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13332 18 XXXXX + 18 + 16 XXXXXX + 16 +
13333 19 XXXXX + 19 XXXXXXXX + 17 XXXXXX + 17 +
13334 20 XXXXX + 20 XXXXXXXX + 18 XXXXXX + 18 +
13337 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
13339 Any other value is treated as `nil'.
13342 *** Printer management (subgroup)
13344 The variable `ps-printer-name-option' determines the option used by
13345 some utilities to indicate the printer name; it's used only when
13346 `ps-printer-name' is a non-empty string. If you're using the lpr
13347 utility to print, for example, `ps-printer-name-option' should be set
13350 The variable `ps-manual-feed' indicates if the printer requires manual
13351 paper feeding. If it's nil, automatic feeding takes place. If it's
13352 non-nil, manual feeding takes place.
13354 The variable `ps-end-with-control-d' specifies whether C-d (\x04)
13355 should be inserted at end of the generated PostScript. Non-nil means
13358 *** Page settings (subgroup)
13360 If variable `ps-warn-paper-type' is nil, it's *not* treated as an
13361 error if the PostScript printer doesn't have a paper with the size
13362 indicated by `ps-paper-type'; the default paper size will be used
13363 instead. If `ps-warn-paper-type' is non-nil, an error is signaled if
13364 the PostScript printer doesn't support a paper with the size indicated
13365 by `ps-paper-type'. This is used when `ps-spool-config' is set to
13368 The variable `ps-print-upside-down' determines the orientation for
13369 printing pages: nil means `normal' printing, non-nil means
13370 `upside-down' printing (that is, the page is rotated by 180 degrees).
13372 The variable `ps-selected-pages' specifies which pages to print. If
13373 it's nil, all pages are printed. If it's a list, list elements may be
13374 integers specifying a single page to print, or cons cells (FROM . TO)
13375 specifying to print from page FROM to TO. Invalid list elements, that
13376 is integers smaller than one, or elements whose FROM is greater than
13377 its TO, are ignored.
13379 The variable `ps-even-or-odd-pages' specifies how to print even/odd
13380 pages. Valid values are:
13382 nil print all pages.
13384 `even-page' print only even pages.
13386 `odd-page' print only odd pages.
13388 `even-sheet' print only even sheets.
13389 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
13390 `even-page', but for values greater than 1, it'll
13391 print only the even sheet of paper.
13393 `odd-sheet' print only odd sheets.
13394 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
13395 `odd-page'; but for values greater than 1, it'll print
13396 only the odd sheet of paper.
13398 Any other value is treated as nil.
13400 If you set `ps-selected-pages' (see there for documentation), pages
13401 are filtered by `ps-selected-pages', and then by
13402 `ps-even-or-odd-pages'. For example, if we have:
13404 (setq ps-selected-pages '(1 4 (6 . 10) (12 . 16) 20))
13406 and we combine this with `ps-even-or-odd-pages' and
13407 `ps-n-up-printing', we get:
13409 `ps-n-up-printing' = 1:
13410 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
13411 nil 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20
13412 even-page 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
13413 odd-page 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
13414 even-sheet 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
13415 odd-sheet 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
13417 `ps-n-up-printing' = 2:
13418 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
13419 nil 1/4, 6/7, 8/9, 10/12, 13/14, 15/16, 20
13420 even-page 4/6, 8/10, 12/14, 16/20
13421 odd-page 1/7, 9/13, 15
13422 even-sheet 6/7, 10/12, 15/16
13423 odd-sheet 1/4, 8/9, 13/14, 20
13425 *** Miscellany (subgroup)
13427 The variable `ps-error-handler-message' specifies where error handler
13428 messages should be sent.
13430 It is also possible to add a user-defined PostScript prologue code in
13431 front of all generated prologue code by setting the variable
13432 `ps-user-defined-prologue'.
13434 The variable `ps-line-number-font' specifies the font for line numbers.
13436 The variable `ps-line-number-font-size' specifies the font size in
13437 points for line numbers.
13439 The variable `ps-line-number-color' specifies the color for line
13440 numbers. See `ps-zebra-color' for documentation.
13442 The variable `ps-line-number-step' specifies the interval in which
13443 line numbers are printed. For example, if `ps-line-number-step' is set
13444 to 2, the printing will look like:
13456 integer an integer specifying the interval in which line numbers are
13457 printed. If it's smaller than or equal to zero, 1
13460 `zebra' specifies that only the line number of the first line in a
13461 zebra stripe is to be printed.
13463 Any other value is treated as `zebra'.
13465 The variable `ps-line-number-start' specifies the starting point in
13466 the interval given by `ps-line-number-step'. For example, if
13467 `ps-line-number-step' is set to 3, and `ps-line-number-start' is set to
13468 3, the output will look like:
13482 The variable `ps-postscript-code-directory' specifies the directory
13483 where the PostScript prologue file used by ps-print is found.
13485 The variable `ps-line-spacing' determines the line spacing in points,
13486 for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
13489 The variable `ps-paragraph-spacing' determines the paragraph spacing,
13490 in points, for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
13493 The variable `ps-paragraph-regexp' specifies the paragraph delimiter.
13495 The variable `ps-begin-cut-regexp' and `ps-end-cut-regexp' specify the
13496 start and end of a region to cut out when printing.
13498 ** hideshow changes.
13500 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
13503 *** Support for java-mode added.
13505 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
13506 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
13508 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at
13509 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
13510 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
13512 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
13513 robust and a lot faster.
13515 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
13517 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
13518 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
13519 documentation for more details.
13521 ** Changes in Enriched mode.
13523 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
13524 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
13525 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
13526 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
13527 the next time unless the fill-column is different.
13529 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
13530 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
13531 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
13532 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
13538 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
13539 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify
13540 the faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new
13541 custom group font-lock-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in your
13542 ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
13543 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
13545 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
13547 *** Maximum decoration
13549 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
13550 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
13551 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
13552 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
13553 to get the old behavior.
13557 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
13559 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
13560 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
13562 *** Configurable support
13564 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
13565 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
13566 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
13567 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
13568 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
13569 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
13570 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
13572 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
13573 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
13574 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
13576 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
13578 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
13579 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
13582 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
13584 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
13590 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
13591 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
13592 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
13593 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
13595 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode
13597 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
13598 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
13599 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
13601 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
13603 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
13604 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
13605 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
13606 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
13607 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
13608 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
13609 Lock mode behavior and the behavior of Font Lock mode.
13611 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
13612 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
13613 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
13614 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
13615 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
13616 the command M-o M-o (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
13618 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
13620 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
13621 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
13622 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
13623 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
13625 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
13628 ** Ada mode changes.
13630 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
13631 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
13632 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
13633 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
13636 *** There are two new commands:
13637 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
13638 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
13640 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
13641 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
13642 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
13644 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
13645 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
13646 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
13648 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
13649 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
13650 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
13651 space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
13653 ** Scheme mode changes.
13655 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
13656 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
13657 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
13658 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
13661 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
13662 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
13663 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
13664 variables as buffer-local variables.
13666 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
13667 Use M-x dsssl-mode.
13669 ** Changes to the emacsclient program
13671 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
13672 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
13673 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
13674 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
13676 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
13677 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
13680 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
13681 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
13682 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
13683 option takes precedence.
13685 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
13686 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
13687 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
13689 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
13690 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
13693 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
13694 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
13696 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
13697 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
13700 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
13701 if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
13702 these register values no longer become completely useless.
13703 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
13704 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
13705 it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
13707 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
13708 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
13709 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
13710 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
13712 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
13713 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
13714 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
13715 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
13716 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
13718 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
13719 since it applies only to the current frame.
13721 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
13722 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
13723 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
13725 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
13726 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
13727 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
13728 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
13729 instead of just the file you are editing.
13733 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
13734 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
13735 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
13736 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
13737 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
13740 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
13741 knows which kind of label is needed.
13743 C-c ) reftex-reference
13744 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
13745 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
13747 C-c [ reftex-citation
13748 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
13749 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
13751 C-c & reftex-view-crossref
13752 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
13755 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
13756 can quickly jump to every section.
13758 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
13759 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
13760 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
13761 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
13762 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
13764 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
13766 *** Info documentation is now available.
13768 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
13769 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
13771 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
13772 bibtex-user-optional-fields.
13774 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
13775 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
13777 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
13778 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
13779 appropriate functions.
13781 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
13782 entries. They are bound by default to C-M-l and C-M-h.
13784 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
13787 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
13788 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
13790 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
13791 shall be delimited.
13793 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
13794 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
13795 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
13797 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
13798 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
13799 prefixed with `ALT'.
13801 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
13802 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
13803 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
13806 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
13807 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
13808 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
13810 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
13811 comma should be inserted at end of last field.
13813 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
13814 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
13815 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
13817 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
13819 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
13821 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
13822 from alien sources.
13824 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
13825 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
13828 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
13831 *** Added support for imenu.
13833 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
13834 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
13835 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
13836 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
13838 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
13839 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
13841 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
13843 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
13845 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
13846 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
13847 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
13850 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
13851 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
13853 ** browse-url changes
13855 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
13856 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
13857 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
13858 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
13859 customization variables.
13861 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
13863 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
13864 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
13865 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
13867 ** Changes in Ediff
13869 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
13870 pops up the Info file for this command.
13872 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
13873 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
13874 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
13877 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
13878 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
13879 files in the same directory.
13881 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
13882 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
13883 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
13885 ** Changes in Viper
13887 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
13888 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
13890 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
13891 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
13892 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
13893 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
13894 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
13895 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
13896 color when Viper is in insert state.
13897 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
13898 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
13899 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
13903 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
13904 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
13905 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
13906 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
13907 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
13909 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
13911 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
13912 constructs are tagged. Files are recognized by the extension .java.
13914 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
13915 recognized by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
13916 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
13918 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
13919 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
13920 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
13921 methods and protocols.
13923 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognized by the extension
13924 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
13925 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
13928 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
13929 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
13930 at least M times and as many as N times.
13932 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
13933 in files has changed slightly.
13935 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
13936 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
13937 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
13938 with old time-stamp-format values.
13940 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
13941 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
13942 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
13945 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
13946 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
13947 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
13948 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
13949 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
13950 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
13952 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
13953 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
13954 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
13956 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
13957 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
13958 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
13959 recommended now will continue to work then.
13961 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
13964 ** There are some additional major modes:
13966 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
13967 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
13968 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
13970 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
13971 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
13974 ** New Lisp packages include:
13976 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
13978 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
13979 be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
13981 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
13983 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
13986 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
13987 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
13990 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
13991 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
13992 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
13993 strings or comments.
13995 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
13996 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
13997 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
13998 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
14001 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
14002 can visit them by short forms of their names.
14004 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
14005 Emacs Lisp function at point.
14007 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
14009 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
14010 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
14012 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
14014 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
14016 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
14018 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
14019 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
14021 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
14022 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
14023 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
14024 original place after inserting the copy.
14026 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
14029 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
14030 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
14031 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
14033 Enable mouse-drag with:
14034 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
14036 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
14038 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
14039 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
14041 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
14042 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
14046 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
14047 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
14048 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
14049 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
14050 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
14051 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
14052 instance) and vice versa.
14054 To use this package load it using
14055 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
14056 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
14057 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
14058 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
14059 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
14060 ways of customization in `.emacs'.
14062 *** Interface to ph.
14064 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
14066 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
14067 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
14070 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
14072 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
14073 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
14074 while the real cursor does not move.
14076 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
14077 for visiting your favorite web sites.
14079 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
14080 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
14084 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
14085 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
14086 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
14087 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
14089 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
14091 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
14093 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
14095 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
14096 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
14097 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
14098 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
14099 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
14101 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
14102 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
14103 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
14104 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
14105 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
14106 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
14108 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
14110 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
14111 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
14112 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
14113 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
14115 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
14116 to start with w32- instead of win32-.
14118 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
14119 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
14122 ** Basic Lisp changes
14124 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
14125 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
14127 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
14128 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
14131 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
14133 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
14135 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
14136 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
14138 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
14139 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
14142 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
14144 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
14146 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
14148 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
14149 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
14150 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
14153 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
14154 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
14155 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
14157 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
14158 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
14159 adding one of these suffixes.
14161 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
14162 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
14163 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
14165 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
14166 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
14168 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
14170 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
14171 You must load the `cl' library to define it.
14173 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
14174 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
14176 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
14178 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
14179 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
14181 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
14182 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
14183 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
14184 works using `save-current-buffer'.
14186 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
14187 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
14190 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
14191 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
14192 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
14195 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
14196 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
14199 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
14201 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
14202 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
14203 Then it returns that string.
14205 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
14207 (with-output-to-string
14208 (princ "The buffer is ")
14209 (princ (buffer-name)))
14211 returns "The buffer is foo".
14213 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
14216 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
14217 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
14218 characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
14220 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
14221 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
14223 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
14224 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
14225 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
14226 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
14227 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
14228 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
14230 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
14231 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
14232 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
14235 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
14236 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
14237 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
14238 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
14239 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
14241 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
14242 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
14243 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
14244 character, which may be more than one buffer position.
14246 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
14247 always one buffer position, need to be changed.
14249 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
14251 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
14252 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
14253 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
14254 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
14257 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
14258 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
14261 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
14263 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
14264 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
14265 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
14266 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
14267 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
14269 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
14271 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
14272 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
14273 more than the number of characters.
14275 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
14276 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
14277 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
14278 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
14279 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
14280 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
14282 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
14283 and returns a string containing those characters.
14285 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
14286 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
14287 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
14288 character, sref signals an error.
14290 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
14291 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
14292 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
14294 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
14295 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
14296 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
14298 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
14299 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
14300 to a vector of the characters in it.
14302 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
14303 of a string. You call it as follows:
14305 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
14307 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
14308 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
14309 This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
14310 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
14311 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
14313 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
14314 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
14316 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
14317 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
14319 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
14320 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
14321 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
14322 which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
14324 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
14326 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
14328 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
14329 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
14330 are not included in the resulting value.
14332 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
14333 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
14334 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
14335 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
14337 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
14338 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
14339 character extends across that column), then the padding character
14340 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
14341 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
14342 column START-COLUMN.
14344 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
14345 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
14346 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
14347 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
14348 changed text, before the change.
14350 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
14351 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
14352 one character set for each script, not for each language.
14354 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
14356 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
14358 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
14359 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
14361 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
14362 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
14363 which identify the character within that character set.
14365 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
14366 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
14367 opposite of split-char.
14369 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
14370 of all the characters between BEG and END.
14372 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
14373 of all the characters in a string.
14375 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
14376 and specifying coding systems.
14378 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
14379 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
14380 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
14381 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
14382 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
14383 as what to do about code conversion.)
14385 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
14386 name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
14388 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
14389 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
14390 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
14392 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
14393 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
14394 to match against a file name.
14396 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
14397 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
14398 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
14399 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
14400 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
14401 specifies the coding system for encoding.
14403 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
14404 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
14406 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
14407 the coding system to use for network sockets.
14409 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
14410 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
14411 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
14414 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
14415 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
14416 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
14417 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
14418 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
14419 specifies the coding system for encoding.
14421 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
14422 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
14424 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
14425 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
14426 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
14427 start the subprocess.
14429 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
14430 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
14431 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
14432 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
14433 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
14435 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
14436 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
14439 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
14440 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
14441 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
14442 connection permanently or until overridden.
14444 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
14445 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
14446 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
14447 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
14448 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
14449 system for one operation at a time.
14451 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
14452 files, subprocesses or network connections.
14454 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what
14455 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
14456 The value is a cons cell,
14457 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
14458 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
14459 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
14460 input to the subprocess.
14462 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
14463 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
14465 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
14466 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
14467 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
14469 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
14470 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
14471 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
14472 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
14475 Thus, instead of writing
14477 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
14478 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
14480 you would now write this:
14482 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
14483 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
14487 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
14488 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
14489 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
14490 for a description of them.
14492 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
14493 should belong to. You define a new group like this:
14495 (defgroup ispell nil
14496 "Spell checking using Ispell."
14499 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
14500 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
14501 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
14502 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
14503 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
14505 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
14506 package should have just one group; a more complex package should
14507 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
14508 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
14509 first-level subgroups.
14511 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
14513 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
14514 separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
14518 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
14519 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
14520 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
14521 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
14522 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
14523 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
14525 ** Text property changes
14527 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
14530 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and
14531 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
14532 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
14533 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
14534 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
14536 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
14537 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
14538 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
14539 position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
14541 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
14542 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
14543 is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
14545 ** Changes in invisibility features
14547 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
14548 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
14549 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
14550 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
14551 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
14552 make the overlay visible.
14554 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
14555 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
14556 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
14557 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
14558 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
14559 t when it should hide it.
14561 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
14563 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
14564 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
14565 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
14566 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
14567 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
14568 Here is an example of how to do this:
14570 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
14571 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
14572 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
14573 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
14576 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
14579 ;; When done with the overlays:
14580 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
14581 ;; Or respectively:
14582 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
14584 ** Changes in syntax parsing.
14586 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
14587 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
14588 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
14589 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
14591 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
14592 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
14593 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
14595 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
14596 character in the buffer is calculated thus:
14598 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
14599 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
14601 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
14602 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
14603 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
14605 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
14606 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
14607 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
14608 determine the syntax type of the character.
14610 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
14611 of the current buffer.
14613 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
14614 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
14615 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
14617 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
14618 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
14619 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
14620 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
14621 another character with the same code (unless quoted).
14623 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
14626 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
14627 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
14628 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
14630 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
14631 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
14632 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
14633 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
14634 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
14636 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
14637 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
14638 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
14640 ** Changes in face features
14642 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
14643 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
14645 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
14646 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
14648 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
14649 set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
14651 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
14652 set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
14654 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
14655 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
14656 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
14657 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
14660 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
14661 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
14663 ** Changes in file-handling functions
14665 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
14666 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
14667 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
14668 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
14670 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
14673 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
14674 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
14676 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
14677 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
14679 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
14680 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
14682 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
14683 character code conversion as well as other things.
14685 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
14686 (formerly it did not).
14688 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
14689 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
14691 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
14692 instead of constant strings.
14694 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
14695 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
14696 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
14698 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
14699 in the same way as before.
14701 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
14702 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
14703 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
14705 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
14706 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
14707 else, and returns nil.
14709 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
14710 directory cannot be listed.
14712 ** Changes in minibuffer input
14714 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
14715 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
14716 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
14717 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
14720 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
14721 It is available through the history command M-n.
14723 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
14724 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
14725 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
14726 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
14727 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
14729 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
14730 argument in this way.
14732 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
14733 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
14734 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
14736 ** Echo area features
14738 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
14739 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
14740 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
14741 after the echo area is cleared.
14743 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
14744 in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
14746 ** Keyboard input features
14748 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
14749 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
14751 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
14752 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
14753 by keyboard macros.
14755 ** Frame-related changes
14757 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
14758 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
14759 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
14761 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
14762 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
14763 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
14765 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
14766 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
14767 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
14768 in the selected frame.
14770 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
14771 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
14772 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
14774 ** X Windows features
14776 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
14777 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
14778 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
14780 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
14781 The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
14783 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
14784 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
14785 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
14787 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
14788 it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
14790 ** Subprocess features
14792 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
14793 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
14796 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
14797 and returns the output from the command as a string.
14799 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
14800 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
14802 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
14803 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
14805 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
14806 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
14807 goes after the other menu items.
14809 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
14810 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
14811 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
14814 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
14815 series of several changes--if that seems safe.
14817 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
14818 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
14821 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
14822 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
14823 but its hook is still run.
14825 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
14826 for errors that are handled by condition-case.
14828 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
14829 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
14830 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
14832 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
14833 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
14834 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
14837 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
14838 way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
14840 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
14841 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
14842 functions like display-time.
14844 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
14845 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
14847 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
14848 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
14849 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
14851 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
14852 if there is an error in compilation.
14854 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
14855 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
14856 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
14857 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
14859 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
14860 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
14861 the *scratch* buffer.
14863 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
14864 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
14865 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
14866 e.g., in Font Lock mode.
14868 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
14869 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
14870 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
14872 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
14873 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
14874 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
14875 and compose-mail-other-frame.
14877 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
14878 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
14879 full name of the specified user will be returned.
14881 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
14882 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
14883 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
14884 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
14885 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
14888 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
14889 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
14890 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
14891 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
14893 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
14894 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
14895 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
14896 is how %S normally pads to two positions.
14898 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
14900 ** imenu.el changes.
14902 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
14903 item from menu created by imenu.
14905 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
14906 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
14907 select one of those items.
14909 * For older news, see the file ONEWS
14911 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
14912 Copyright information:
14914 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004,
14915 2005, 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
14917 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
14918 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
14919 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
14920 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
14922 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
14923 of this document, or of portions of it,
14924 under the above conditions, provided also that they
14925 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
14929 paragraph-separate: "[
\f]*$"
14932 arch-tag: 1aca9dfa-2ac4-4d14-bebf-0007cee12793